JP7077062B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a pachislot gaming machine, or the like.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to perform a special effect with a successful mission if a predetermined number of gaming balls can be inserted into the winning opening (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-2215223

The present inventor may be able to create new entertainment by devising the conditions for generating the effects in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on the gaming machine. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
A symbol change means that can change the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
A lottery means to draw a predetermined lottery when a prize is won,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result, when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. Possible specific game state transition means and
It is provided with an information suggesting means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined winning is established during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means.
The information suggestion means
If the predetermined prize is established within the first period during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means, at least a plurality of types of effects are performed within the first period. While it is possible to suggest the first information, if the predetermined winning is established within the second period different from the first period, at least the plurality of types within the second period. It is possible to suggest a second information different from the first information by performing a relatively smaller kind of production than the production of.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(1) A symbol changing means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 5C, a second special symbol display unit 5D, a liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (for example, a big hit), when a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is performed. (For example, a specific game state transition means that can shift to a jackpot game state),
Effect mode control that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode (for example, normal mode (1)) and a second effect mode (for example, normal mode (2)). Means and
Provided with an information suggestion means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined condition (for example, winning a game ball) is satisfied.
The information suggestion means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first effect mode, it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information (for example, information about a big hit), while the predetermined information in the second effect mode. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to suggest a second predetermined information (for example, information regarding a probabilistic gaming state) different from the first predetermined information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), it is possible to suggest predetermined information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first effect mode, it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information, while when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second effect mode, it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information. , Second, it is configured to be able to suggest predetermined information. In this way, by making the content of the suggested information different according to the effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to create diversity in the effect for suggesting the information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the present invention, new entertainment properties can be created.

It is a front view of the game board which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic perspective view which looked at the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a schematic front view of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which separated the dish unit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the top decoration is separated in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the right side decorative member and the left side decorative member are separated in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic perspective view which shows from the right diagonal direction of a dish unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows from the left oblique direction of a dish unit. It is a schematic front view of a dish unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the right side of a dish unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the left side of a dish unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows from the lower oblique direction of the dish unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a dish unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which a part part of the dish unit was removed. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which a part part of the dish unit was removed. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the structure around a speaker in a dish unit. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the blowing mechanism around a speaker in a dish unit. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the operation of a blast mechanism. It is an internal plan view for demonstrating the operation of a blast mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the operation of a blast mechanism. It is an internal plan view for demonstrating the operation of a blast mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating various tables of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the right decorative member. It is a schematic plan view which shows the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. It is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the incident rear end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member. It is a partial notch rear view which shows the incident rear end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member. It is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the exit front end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right decorative member. It is a partial notch front view which shows the emission front end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. It is an exploded perspective view of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is an exploded perspective view of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows the internal structure of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the internal structure of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is an exploded top view of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration member in the top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows a part part of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows a part part of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the right side of a part part of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the left side of a part part of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic rear view which shows a part part of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the modification of the blast mechanism. It is a front view of the 1st accessory apparatus and the 2nd accessory apparatus which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the 1st accessory device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view from the front of the first accessory device. It is a perspective view from the right front which mainly showed the frame body in the 1st accessory device. It is an enlarged perspective view from the front of the left part of the lower accessory elevating mechanism. It is a perspective view from the left front which mainly showed the frame body in the 1st accessory device. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower movable staging object. It is a perspective view from the upper right rear which showed the lower movable staging object. It is a perspective view from the lower right front which showed the lower movable staging object. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower rotating ornament. It is a perspective view from the upper left front which showed the lower rotating ornament. (A) It is an enlarged perspective view which showed the engaging recess. (B) It is a side sectional schematic diagram which showed the engaging recess. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower rotation drive mechanism. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the inside of the left case. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the rotation shaft part. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper right front which showed the rotation shaft part. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper right front which showed the state of assembling the rotation shaft part to the lower rotation decoration body. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper right front which showed the state of assembling the lower rotation decoration body to the lower rotation drive mechanism. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the upper movable staging object. It is a perspective view from the upper right rear which showed the upper movable staging object. (A) It is an enlarged perspective view which showed the engaging convex part. (B) It is a side sectional schematic diagram which showed the engaging convex part. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper right front which showed the left movable staging object. It is an exploded perspective view from the lower right rear which showed the left part movable production object. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper right front which showed the right part movable production object. It is an exploded perspective view from the upper left rear which showed the right part movable staging object. It is a front view of the game board which showed the 1st state. It is a front view which showed the state that the lower rotation decoration body and the upper rotation decoration body are rotated when it is switched to the second state. It is a front view which showed the state that the lower rotation decoration body and the upper rotation decoration body are close to each other when it is switched to the second state. It is a front view of the game board which showed the 2nd state. (A) It is a side sectional schematic diagram which showed the state which the engaging convex part starts to fit into the engaging concave part. (B) It is a side sectional schematic diagram which showed how the relative position of the engaging convex part and the engaging concave part is adjusted by an inclined surface. It is a front view which showed the state that the lower rotation decoration body and the upper rotation decoration body are rotated when it is switched to a third state. It is a front view which showed the state that the lower rotation decoration body and the upper rotation decoration body are close to each other when it is switched to the third state. It is a front view of the game board which showed the 3rd state. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the message transmission of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit type determination table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit type determination table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start mouth winning place detection process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number subtraction process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end interval processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern table setting process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol control process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control circuit main processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part process shown in FIG. 94. It is a flowchart which shows the button input interrupt process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message setting process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the direct table registration process which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message transmission processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the transition transition of the effect mode which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle plate acquisition process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a normal round performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during an interval performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the round for plate acquisition performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the plate acquisition result display processing performed in the sub-control circuit. (A) is a diagram showing a navigation lottery table. (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the aura and the probability variation reliability in the question mark with an aura. It is a figure for demonstrating the display timing of a plate acquisition result. It is a figure which shows the image which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the 1st big hit mode. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit time processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the image which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a big hit occurs in the 1st special mode. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment occurs. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment occurs. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment occurs. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the big hit of G alignment occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the yellow 7 addition process in the look-ahead effect performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the yellow 7 addition processing performed in the sub-control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table. (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of yellow 7 stocks and the effect color of the logo cover. It is a flowchart which shows the round start processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the attacker winning process performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the image which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 addition effect performed when the result of a special symbol variation is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the image which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 addition effect performed when the result of a special symbol variation is a loss. It is a figure which shows the image which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the 2nd big hit mode. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the freeze effect occurs in the 2nd special mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of the variation effect pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of the look-ahead effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the time saving mode B performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the series of images which are displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the freeze effect occurs in the time saving mode B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of the effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the Crune winning process performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving mode B (1) middle processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving mode B (2) middle processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a normal mode performed in a sub-control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows the probability change suggestion sound production determination table. (B) is a figure which shows the probability change suggestion lamp effect determination table. (C) is a diagram showing a jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of the effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the time saving mode A. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect (1) execution processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect (2) execution processing performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the countdown effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of the effect pattern.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. The gaming machines according to the present invention include general pachinko gaming machines including enclosed pachinko gaming machines and general pachislot gaming machines, but in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machines of the form shown in the figure are assumed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is surrounded by guide rails (outer rail 36, inner rail 37), and a rolling region in which the gaming ball can roll and flow (for example, the gaming region 1p). A main body frame (not shown) provided with the game board 1 having a A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the machine, a light guide plate 1031 that is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 1 and displays a predetermined image by light emission, and a light guide plate 1031 provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031. A back box 1055 in which various accessories (movable effect, light emitting effect, etc.) are arranged is attached. In addition, in this embodiment, the "role" refers to a staging device that produces a staging by moving or emitting light.

The back box 1055 is directly attached to the back side of the game board 1 via the light guide plate 1031. The back box 1055 is provided on a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by a main body frame on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 attached to the back side of the game board 1. Also, from the viewpoint of repair / inspection, it may be attached via the rear frame so that it can be easily separated from the main body frame.

A display device (not shown) for performing a predetermined effect display is provided on the rear frame (not shown) so as to be removable from the back. The display device may be detachably provided on the back side of the back box 1055.

The display mode of the display device (not shown) is controlled by the sub control board based on a command from the main control board. For example, in the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is assumed as the display device. The display device may display a predetermined image effect, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display. For example, the display device includes a cathode ray tube including a CRT (CathedeRayTube), a dot LED (LightEmittingDiode), a segment LED, an EL (ElectronicLuminescent), a plasma, and the like. It may be a thing.

The game board 1 is provided with an opening 1h that allows the display mode to be visually displayed on the display device to be visually recognized, and the surface (front surface) of the game board 1 includes an area including the game board opening 1h. A game area 1p in which the game ball can roll and flow down is configured. An appropriate decorative member 1g is provided on the upper portion of the opening 1h.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame (not shown), and in that state, the above-mentioned main body frame is attached to the outer frame via a main body frame hinge. It is rotatably supported.

The table frame 3 includes various table frame constituent members, and the table frame constituent members include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and various decorative members for producing an effect by light. (Top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The speakers 10a and 10b are covered with a front cover 147c (more specifically, cover members 11a and 11b). The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the table frame 3 are included.

The transparent plate unit 7 is composed of one or a plurality of transparent plate members (for example, glass material), and the front frame base plate (right side base plate 3aa, left side base plate 3ab, and the left side base plate 3ab) provided in the front frame 3 are provided. The front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the lower base plate 3ac) is detachably attached from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate, and the front frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. It is configured to face the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 in the closed state.

The plate unit 8 is provided on the upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and on the lower side of the upper plate 17, for example, a lower plate capable of storing game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. A plate 18 is provided.

Further, on the back surface of the back box 1055, a main control board (not shown) is provided in a state of being housed in a case.

Although not particularly limited, for example, a sub control board and a payout / launch control board are connected to the main control board via a relay board (not shown). In this case, the sub-control board has display control in the display device, control related to the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c described above, production control of various accessories, and various combinations in response to various commands supplied from the main control board. It controls various LEDs used for objects and decorative members. Further, a launching device 26, a payout device for paying out a game ball, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control board. Further, for example, a sub-relay board that transfers signals to the sub-control board, a sub-ROM relay board that stores a program related to game production, a power supply board that supplies electric power, and the like are also provided.

Further, in the rear frame in which the back box 1055 is arranged, for example, a ball tank (not shown) for accommodating a rental ball or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball, and a plurality of game balls from the ball tank are continuously placed. A rail unit that rolls down (not shown), a payout device that can be connected to the lower end of the rail unit (not shown), and a ball that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper plate 17. Discharge passages (not shown) are connected in series.

<Outline configuration of the game board>
The game board 1 has a plurality of passing areas (general winning opening 1013, start) on which a game nail and a game ball rolling down the game area can pass on the front surface of the game board body (panel body) made of a transparent acrylic panel or the like. A winning opening 1009, a large winning opening 1011), a stage 1001, and the like are arranged (see FIG. 1). The various game members arranged on the front surface of the game board main body (panel main body) are not particularly limited to the present embodiment, and various game members can be appropriately redesigned.

The stage 1001 is provided on the base plate 1000 arranged along the opening 1h, and the game ball rolling down the game area 1p enters from the warp entrance 1007 arranged in the game area 1p. , A member that rolls a game ball entered from the warp entrance 1007 left and right in a substantially central region of the game board 1 and then returns it to the game area 1p again, and is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. The stage can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.

The general winning opening 1013, the starting winning opening 1009, and the large winning opening 1011 are incorporated and arranged in a notched region having a predetermined shape provided in a predetermined region of the panel main body of the game board 1. The general winning opening 1013, the starting winning opening 1009, and the large winning opening 1011 do not have any particular features in the present embodiment, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention without being limited to the illustrated embodiment. ..

Further, behind the opening 1h, a first accessory device 4000 and a second accessory device 5000 that perform an effect are arranged. The specific configurations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 will be described later.

<Characteristic configuration of gaming machines>
As shown in FIGS. 2 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a component characteristic of the table frame 3. The components of the table frame 3 include the right side base plate 3aa, the left side base plate 3ab, and the lower base plate 3ac that constitute the table frame base plate, as well as the transparent plate unit 7, the plate unit 8, the top decoration 14, and the right side decorative member 15. , There is a left decorative member 16. The dish unit 8 is attached to the lower base plate 3ac. The top decoration 14 is attached to the upper part of the right side base plate 3aa and the left side base plate 3ab. The right decorative member 15 is attached to the lower part of the right base plate 3aa, and the left decorative member 16 is attached to the lower part of the left base plate 3ab. The main characteristic components will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<About the dish unit 8>
As shown in FIGS. 7 to 15, the plate unit 8 includes an upper plate upper cover 8a, a lower plate cover 8b, an under cover 8c, a support member 8d, a first operation unit 9A, a second operation unit 9B, a speaker unit 10, and a blower. It has a mechanism 110, a light emitting unit 12, an upper plate 17, a lower plate 18, and the like. The upper plate 17 is provided at a position on the upper left side of the support member 8d, the first operation unit 9A is provided at a position at the upper center of the support member 8d on the right side of the upper plate 17, and the second operation unit 9B is provided. , Is provided at a position closer to the upper right side of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the first operation unit 9A. The lower plate 18 is provided at a position on the lower left side of the support member 8d below the upper plate 17, and the speaker unit 10 is provided at a position at the lower center of the support member 8d on the right side of the lower plate 18. The mechanism 110 is provided at a position on the lower right side of the support member 8d on the right side of the speaker unit 10, and the light emitting unit 12 is on the lower right side of the support member 8d on the right side of the blower mechanism 110 and on the left side of the launcher 26. It is installed at the position of. The first operation unit 9A, the second operation unit 9B, the speaker unit 10, the blower mechanism 110, the light emitting unit 12, the upper plate 17, and the lower plate 18 are the operation members described later of the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B. It is covered with the upper plate upper cover 8a, the lower plate cover 8b, and the under cover 8c so as to expose the (operation button) and the upper surfaces of the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18. The upper plate upper cover 8a, a part of the lower plate cover 8b, and the under cover 8c are removable.

[Upper plate 17 and lower plate 18]
The upper plate 17 has an upper plate main body 17p or the like capable of storing the game ball, and a payout outlet 170 for paying out the game ball to the upper plate main body 17p. The lower plate 18 has a lower plate main body 18p and the like capable of storing game balls, a discharge port 180 for discharging the game balls to the lower plate main body 18p, and a lower plate main body 18p for dropping the game balls. It has a ball punching portion 181 of.

[First operation unit 9A]
The first operation unit 9A is the same as the operation unit 9 described above, and in addition to the operation member (operation button) 2000 that can be operated by the player, the press detection sensor 2035 (not shown) and the illuminated board 2183 (not shown). Omitted) etc. The operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is exposed from an opening provided in the center of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the pressing operation surface of the operation member 2000 is formed in a circular shape. As is clear from the effect lottery table (see FIG. 23) described later, the operation member 2000 is provided as a button for operation effect that is relatively frequently used. The press detection sensor 2035 and the illumination board 2183 are connected to a sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 22) described later via wiring such as a harness (not shown) for exclusive use. As a result, when the operating member 2000 is pressed, the operation signal from the pressing detection sensor 2035 is supplied to the sub control board 33.

[Second operation unit 9B]
The second operation unit 9B has a common board of a ball pulling button 22, a ball lending button 23, and a returning button 24, as well as a pressing button 3000 for the player to operate during the operation effect and a cross button 3100 for the player to select and operate. It was implemented and configured on the 3200. Displacement movements of the ball lending button 23, the return button 24, the pressing button 3000, and the cross button 3100 are detected by the pressing detection sensors provided on the common board 3200 corresponding to each. The common board 3200 is connected to a sub-control board 33 and a card unit device CU (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, via wiring such as a harness (not shown). As a result, when the ball lending button 23 or the return button 24 is pressed, the ball lending operation signal or the return operation signal by the pressing detection sensor is supplied from the common board 3200 to the card unit device CU, while the pressing button 3000 or the cross button. At the time of pressing operation of 3100, the effect operation signal and the selection operation signal by the pressing detection sensor are supplied from the common board 3200 to the sub control board 33. The pressing button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B is exposed from an opening provided at a position on the right side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the pressing operation surface of the pressing button 3000 is formed in a rectangular shape. As is clear from the effect lottery table (see FIG. 23) described later, the press button 3000 is provided as a button for operation effect that is relatively infrequently used. Here, the cross-shaped button 3100 and the pressing button 3000 are both configured in a substantially square shape having linear sides, and the linear sides are arranged so as to face each other.

[Speaker unit 10]
The speaker unit 10 is a bass reflex type that amplifies low-pitched sound, and has a speaker 10c and an enclosure 10e. The speaker 10c is provided on the front surface of the enclosure 10e, and the front portion of the speaker 10c is covered by the speaker cover 10k provided in the front center portion of the lower plate cover 8b. The sound generated in the front part of the speaker 10c is directly transmitted to the player through the speaker cover 10k, while the sound generated in the rear part of the speaker 10c is temporarily stored inside the enclosure 10e.

The enclosure 10e is designed to contain the sound generated from the rear portion of the speaker 10c so as not to interfere with the sound generated from the front portion thereof, and is formed to have a relatively large volume. As shown in FIG. 15, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is formed so as to protrude to the upper right side of the lower plate 18. Further, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is arranged so as to be in contact with the bottom portion of the upper plate main body 17p. Further, the lower left 10eb of the enclosure 10e is arranged so as to be in contact with the right end portion of the lower plate main body 18p.

As shown in FIG. 17, an opening 10 ec leading to a conduit (not shown) provided inside is provided at the lower right end portion of the enclosure 10e. Such a conduit and the opening 10ec propagate to the outside while resonating and enhancing the sound emitted from the rear part of the speaker 10c to the inside of the enclosure 10e by the principle of so-called Helmholtz resonance. The sound propagating from the opening 10ec to the outside is perceived as a rich and powerful bass by overlapping with the sound emitted from the front portion of the speaker 10c. Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air flows out from the opening 10ec to the outside in conjunction with the generation of the sound. When no sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air does not flow out from the opening 10ec.

According to such a speaker unit 10, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e has a partially bulging shape, a sufficient volume can be secured as compared with, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped enclosure, and sufficient sound can be obtained from the speaker 10c. Powerful bass can be generated by pressure.

Further, when the sound is generated from the speaker 10c, at the same time, the wind can be sent out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e to the outside with sufficient wind pressure.

Further, when the speaker 10c generates sound, the entire enclosure 10e vibrates according to the sound pressure, but the upper left portion 10ea and the lower left 10eb of the enclosure 10e are part of the upper plate main body 17p and the lower plate main body 18p. Since they are in contact with each other, the vibration is transmitted to the entire upper plate body 17p and the lower plate body 18p. As a result, even when a large number of game balls are stored in the upper plate main body 17p and the lower plate main body 18p, the ball clogging of the game balls coming out of the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180 is effectively caused by vibration. Can be prevented.

[Blower mechanism 110]
The blower mechanism 110 switches the direction of the wind sent from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e, and is arranged adjacent to the right side surface of the enclosure 10e. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the blower mechanism 110 includes cover members 110A and 110B that can be divided into two left and right, a solenoid 111, a slide member 112, a link member 113, a spring 114, an opening / closing member 115, and an opening / closing detection sensor 116. Has. The solenoid 111, the slide member 112, the link member 113, the spring 114, the opening / closing member 115, and the opening / closing detection sensor 116 are housed inside the cover members 110A and 110B.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the cover member 110A is provided with a space portion 110a in which the opening / closing member 115 can be closed / opened in the direction straight from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e. The lower part of the space portion 110a is always open regardless of whether the opening / closing member 115 is closed or opened, and the ventilation port 8ca provided in the undercover 8c is located (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the cover member 110B is provided with an opening 110b at a position facing the space 110a. On the right side of the opening 110b, an air outlet 80 provided on the removable lower right side cover 8ba as a part of the lower plate cover 8b is located (see FIGS. 13, 16, and 17). As a result, when the opening / closing member 115 closes the space portion 110a, the wind sent from the opening 10ec hits the opening / closing member 115 and is blocked, and is guided to the lower side of the space portion 110a without passing through the opening 110b. Be taken. The wind guided to the lower side of the space portion 110a is sent to the outside through the ventilation port 8ca of the undercover 8c. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 115 is in a state where the space portion 110a is opened, the wind sent from the opening 10ec flows almost straight without being blocked by the opening / closing member 115, passes through the space portion 110a and the opening 110b, and then to the right. It is sent out to the outside through the air outlet 80 of the lower side cover 8ba. The firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 is arranged at a position substantially directly facing the blower port 80, and the wind emitted from the blower port 80 hits the hand of the player holding the firing handle 26b. That is, since the flow path through which the wind flows from the opening 10ec to the launch handle 26b via the space portion 110a, the opening 110b, and the air outlet 80 is formed substantially straight, the wind pressure can be applied to the hand of the player holding the launch handle 26b. The wind can be reached without weakening as much as possible, and the player can surely feel the wind.
Further, regardless of whether the opening / closing member 115 is closed or open, the sound transmitted from the opening 10ec together with the wind is emitted to the outside through either the ventilation port 80 or the ventilation port 8ca, and thus is due to Helmholtz resonance. You can fully experience the deep bass without reducing the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the solenoid 111 has a plunger 111a that can be projected and retracted in conjunction with an on / off operation. The tip of the plunger 111a is connected to the slide member 112. The slide member 112 is supported by the cover member 110A so as to be movable along the horizontal direction. The slide member 112 is formed with an elongated hole 112a so as to extend long in the vertical direction. The connecting portion 113a of the link member 113 is movably locked in the elongated hole 112a. The base end portion 113b of the link member 113 is rotatably supported by the cover member 110A, and one end of the spring 114 is locked to a portion near the tip end portion of the link member 113. The other end of the spring 114 is locked to an appropriate portion of the cover member 110A. An elongated hole 113c is formed at the tip of the link member 113. A connecting pin 115a provided in the opening / closing member 115 is movably locked to the elongated hole 113c. The opening / closing member 115 is guided to the cover member 110A so as to be movable between the closed position staying in the space portion 110a and the open position deviated from the space portion 110a. The open / close detection sensor 116 is composed of, for example, a touch sensor or a proximity sensor, and when the open / close member 115 is in the open position, a part of the link member 113 is in contact with or close to the open / close member 113, so that the space portion 110a is in the open state. Is detected. When the opening / closing member 115 is in the closed position, the link member 113 is separated from the opening / closing detection sensor 116 to detect that the space portion 110a is in the closed state. The open / close detection sensor 116 is electrically connected to the sub control board 33.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the solenoid 111 is off and the plunger 111a is in the protruding position, the slide member 112 is located to the left in the drawing, and the tip end side of the link member 113 is pulled by the spring 114. The opening / closing member 115 connected to the elongated hole 113c at the tip portion via the connecting pin 115a stays at the closed position of the space portion 110a and closes the space portion 110a. At this time, since the link member 113 is located at a position separated from the open / close detection sensor 116, a detection signal indicating a closed state is supplied from the open / close detection sensor 116 to the sub-control board 33.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the solenoid 111 is turned on, the plunger 111a moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. When the plunger 111a moves to the retracted position, the slide member 112 moves to the right side in the drawing, and accordingly, the tip end side of the link member 113 counterclockwise around the base end portion 113b against the pulling force of the spring 114. Rotates in the direction of. As a result, the opening / closing member 115 connected to the elongated hole 113c of the link member 113 via the connecting pin 115a moves from the space portion 110a to the retracted position on the right side in the drawing, whereby the space portion 110a is opened. Become. At this time, since the link member 113 is in contact with or close to the open / close detection sensor 116, the open / close detection sensor 116 supplies a detection signal indicating an open state to the sub-control board 33.

According to such a ventilation mechanism 110, the flow path of the air from the opening 10ec to the firing handle 26b via the ventilation port 80 becomes substantially linear, and the space portion 110a located between the opening 10ec and the ventilation port 80a. Is controlled to be in the closed / open state, and when the space portion 110a is in the closed state, the flow of wind from the opening 10ec can be guided to the ventilation port 8ca located below the space portion 110a, while the space portion 110a is In the open state, the flow of air from the opening 10ec can be linearly guided from the space 110a through the opening 110b to the air outlet 80. The wind coming out of the air outlet 80 flows straight toward the launch handle 26b and hits the player holding the launch handle 26b. As a result, the wind can be felt by the skin sensation as well as the hearing to hear the deep bass. When the wind from the opening 10 ec is guided to the vent 8ca, the player's hand is not attached to the vicinity of the vent 8ca, so that, for example, only the deep bass can be felt by hearing without feeling the wind. ..

[Light emitting unit 12]
The light emitting unit 12 irradiates the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b with irradiation light, and is arranged diagonally above the left of the firing handle 26b. Although the details of the light emitting unit 12 are not shown in the illustration, the light emitting unit 12 has a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means, a light emitting board on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, a light guide plate for guiding light from the plurality of LEDs in a predetermined direction, and the like. It is composed of. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, an irradiation window 81 provided on the removable upper right side cover 8bb as a part of the lower plate cover 8b is provided in a predetermined direction in which the light from the light emitting unit 12 is guided. There is. The light from the light emitting unit 12 is emitted toward the firing handle 26b through the irradiation window 81, and is reflected as a spotlight in the hand of the player holding the firing handle 26b. As a result, apart from the wind that appeals to the skin sensation and the deep bass that appeals to the auditory sense, it is possible to stimulate and feel the visual sense by the irradiation light.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Next, the control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In FIG. 22, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 22, the gaming machine has a main control board 28 as a main control means for controlling the game, and a sub control board 33 as a sub control means for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. ..

The main control board 28 includes a main CPU 280, a main ROM 281 which is a read-only memory, a main RAM 282 which is a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 283, an I / O port 284, a command output port 285 as a command transmission means, and a clock pulse for reset. It includes a generation circuit 286 and a game information output circuit 287. The main control board 28 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.).

The main CPU 280 is connected to the main ROM 281 and the main RAM 282, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 281.

A first start port switch 311 arranged behind the first start port (not shown) in the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 311, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 312 arranged behind the second start port (not shown) in the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 312, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 311 and second start port switch 312 mainly control a predetermined detection signal as a prize when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port and the second start port. It is supplied to the substrate 28.

A passing gate switch 314 arranged behind a passing gate (not shown) in the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 314, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 5A provided on the game board 1. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 5A, an effect image for the player to understand that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 314 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate. As a result, the passing gate switch 314 gives an opportunity to open the second starting port.

A general winning opening switch 310 arranged behind a general winning opening (not shown) provided on the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. When the game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 310, a preset number of prize balls are played by the payout device 35.

A first special winning opening count switch 315 arranged behind the first winning opening (not shown) in the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. The first big winning opening count switch 315 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the first big winning opening. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 315, the payout device 35 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180 to the upper plate 17 or the lower side. Pay out to the plate 18.

The second major winning opening count switch 316 arranged behind the second major winning opening (not shown) in the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. The second big winning opening count switch 316 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second big winning opening. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 316, the payout device 35 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180 to the upper plate 17. Alternatively, pay out to the lower plate 18.

These 1st big winning opening count switch 315 and 2nd big winning opening count switch 316 send a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 when the game ball passes through the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening. Supply to.

A specific area switch 317A and a non-specific area switch 317B arranged in a specific area and a non-specific area (not shown) inside the second special winning opening are connected to the main control board 28. The specific area switch 317A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 317B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area in the big hit gaming state.

The main control board 28 includes a second large winning opening solenoid 315A for driving a first large winning opening shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the first special winning opening, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second large winning opening. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening solenoid 316A that drives (not shown). As a result, the first large winning opening shutter is in an open state (first aspect) in which it is easy to win a game ball in the first large winning opening, and in a closed state (second aspect) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball. ), And in a situation where the first prize opening is at least closed, the second prize opening shutter is in an open state where the game ball can win the second prize opening. , The game ball is driven to fluctuate into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening drive of the first prize opening and the second prize opening by the first prize opening shutter and the second prize opening shutter is the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5C provided on the game board 1. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display unit 5D and the game is changed to the big hit game state.

The main control board 28 controls a blade member solenoid 313 that opens and closes a blade member (not shown) provided at the second starting port. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 5A in a predetermined light emitting mode, the blade member is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port. Become.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state) that is not the time-saving gaming state is 1/256, and the blade member is not released. .. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 255/256, and when this is won, the blade member is opened three times for, for example, 1.3 seconds. Further, in the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols that are the winning symbols is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second starting port is opened is 10 counts (10).

The main control board 28 controls a displacement member solenoid 318 that operates to open and close a displacement member (not shown) in a specific region in the second prize opening. As a result, when the round game in the big hit game state is being executed, the displacement member is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area. On the other hand, when the displacement member is closed even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area.

The first special symbol holding display unit 5E is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 311 while the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D is variable-displaying. 1 The first special based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variablely displayed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D. The number of times the execution (start) of the variable display of the symbol is suspended, that is, the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 5F is the second when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 312 while the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D is variablely displaying. 1 The second special based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D. The number of pending execution (starting) of the variable display of the symbol, that is, the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be varied and displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port and the second starting port.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of holdings in which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 280 wins a game ball in the first starting opening and the second starting opening. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 311 and the second start port switch 312, the maximum number of hold numbers of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four (that is, four detections). It is stored up to the number of times), and the fifth and subsequent items are not stored as the number of pending items. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of reserved first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 5C is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 5C is the first of the main RAM 282. 1 The special symbol game information is stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) as start storage, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 282. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 5D, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 5D corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 5D. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 282, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings of 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 282. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting opening and the second starting opening is eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 5E and the second special symbol holding display are displayed. The number of pending displays by the 5th floor is also four.

In the open state of the 1st big winning opening by the 1st big winning opening shutter, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the 1st big winning opening count switch 315 becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 10). Alternatively, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as the elapse of the opening time described later described in advance is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big winning opening shutter has elapsed, the first big winning opening shutter is driven to close the first big winning opening.

Similarly, in the open state of the 2nd big winning opening by the 2nd big winning opening shutter, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the 2nd big winning opening count switch 316 becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 10). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as the elapse of the opening time described later described in advance is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter has elapsed, the second big winning opening shutter is driven to close the second big winning opening.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening and the second big winning opening are repeated based on the preset big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit opening / closing pattern). In the big hit game state, the game in which each of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit opening / closing pattern) is a "round game (round). Game) ". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. About the state from when the 1st big prize opening or the 2nd big winning opening is closed by one round game until the 1st big winning opening or the 2nd big winning opening is opened as the next round game Also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening and the second prize opening may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening and the second prize opening is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit game state of the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is defined to be repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times. There is. Of course, in the small hit game state, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened once or a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state in which the small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. The gaming state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, when a small hit is won in a non-probable variable gaming state and the game shifts to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probable variable gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, it does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probabilistic gaming state and the game shifts to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probabilistic gaming state remains. It remains in the probabilistic gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probabilistic gaming state.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. In one round game, if the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the 1st big winning opening or the 2nd big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening The winning opening is closed, and the round game is terminated without opening the first major winning opening and the second major winning opening for the remaining number of openings.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern). As a result, the specific area becomes an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through a specific area and win a V prize, whereas in a round game other than the specific round game, it is assumed that the game ball wins in the second major winning opening. However, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area or becomes difficult. That is, the types of jackpot gaming states include jackpot gaming states that include a specific round game and jackpot gaming states that do not include a specific round game.

On the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D, the symbol consisting of numbers is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 except in a specific case. (Decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit", the liquid crystal display is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed on the screen of the display device 4 becomes a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). An effect image for a big hit is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 280 of such a main control board 28 is a special game (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (first start port, second start port) in the game area 1p. ) Is realized by a lottery means that can be drawn by lottery.

The main ROM 281 stores a program for causing the main CPU 280 to execute various processes such as a big hit lottery and a symbol lottery, and various tables.

For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the table stored in the main ROM 281 includes a big hit lottery table and a symbol lottery table. The jackpot lottery table is used when the jackpot lottery is performed by random number lottery. For example, if a random number value of 0 to 254 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 255, it is lost, and if a random number value of 255 is extracted, it is a jackpot. It stipulates that you will be elected. The symbol lottery table is used to determine the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) by random number lottery at the time of big hit winning. In such a symbol lottery table, for example, regarding the first special symbol (special diagram 1), when a random number value of 0 to 35 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 99, the 4R normal symbol corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is obtained. When the random number value of 36 to 65 is extracted, the 16R normal symbol corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot is determined, and when the random number value of 66 to 85 is extracted, the 4R probability variation symbol corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot is determined. , It is stipulated that when a random number value of 86 to 99 is extracted, a 16R probability variation symbol corresponding to a 16R probability variation jackpot is determined. Further, the symbol lottery table determines, for example, the 4R probability variation symbol corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot when a random number value of 0 to 33 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 99 with respect to the second special symbol (special diagram 1). However, it is stipulated that when a random number value of 34 to 99 is extracted, the 16R probability variation symbol corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined.

The main RAM 282 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 280. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 280, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 282.

The initial reset circuit 283 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 280.

The I / O port 284 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 280 and output signals from the main CPU 280 to various devices.

The command output port 285 transmits various commands from the main CPU 280 to the sub control board 33.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 286 generates a clock pulse for executing the timer interrupt process at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

The game information output circuit 287 is for outputting various information to the externally connected hall computer HP or the external information display device ED.

Various devices connected to the main control board 28 include a second special winning opening solenoid 315A, a second special winning opening solenoid 316A, a vane member solenoid 313, a displacement member solenoid 318, and an external terminal board 320.

The external terminal board 320 is abbreviated as an outer end board, and is an external information display device ED having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or a hall that manages a plurality of gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with an external device such as a computer HP.

Various switches connected to the main control board 28 include a general winning opening switch 310, a first starting opening switch 311, a second starting opening switch 312, a passing gate switch 314, a first large winning opening count switch 315, and a second. The winning opening count switch 316, the specific area switch 317A, the non-specific area switch 317B, and the backup clear switch 319 are included.

The backup clear switch 319 clears the backup data of the main control board 28 and the payout / launch control board 34, which will be described later, in response to the operation of the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 35, and the card unit device CU are connected to the main control board 28 via the payout / launch control board 34.

The main control board 28 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control board 34. The payout / launch control board 34 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 35, and the launch device 26, the payout device 35, and the card unit device CU are connected to the payout / launch control board 34.

The card unit device CU is connected to a second operation unit 9B that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive signals to and from the second operation unit 9B. be.

The payout / launch control board 34 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control board 28 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit device CU, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 35. As a result, the payout device 35 is made to pay out the game ball. The payout device 35 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, and pays out to the general winning opening, the first major winning opening, or the second major winning opening. 10 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls for each prize.

The payout / launch control board 34 becomes a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Power is supplied to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The sub control board 33 is connected to the main control board 28, and is configured to be supplied with various commands from the main control board 28.

The sub control board 33 performs various controls, mainly controls related to the effect operation, in response to various commands supplied from the main control board 28, and is a sub CPU 330, a program ROM 331, a work RAM 332, and a command input port 333. , Real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC: Real-Time Clock") 334, display control circuit 335, acoustic control circuit 336, light emission control circuit 337, and effect device control circuit 338. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 335. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the acoustic control circuit 336. A lamp and various LEDs (collectively referred to as a lamp / LED 260 in FIG. 22) are connected to the light emission control circuit 337. The effect device control circuit 338 is connected to various movable effect objects and movable mechanisms of the movable members (collectively referred to as the movable effect device 270 in FIG. 22).

Further, the sub control board 33 is connected to the first operation unit 9A, and signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the first operation unit 9A can be input. For example, when the pressing detection sensor detects a state in which the operating member (operation button) 2000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operating member 2000 is input from the pressing detection sensor to the sub control board 33. The sub control board 33 is also connected to the second operation unit 9B, and signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the second operation unit 9B can be input. For example, when the pressing detection sensor detects the state in which the pressing button 3000 is pressed, the pressing detection sensor inputs an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the pressing button 3000 to the sub control board 33.

The sub CPU 330 executes various processes, mainly processes related to the staging operation, according to the program stored in the program ROM 331. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 330 controls the entire sub control board 33 according to various commands supplied from the main control board 28.

The program ROM 331 mainly stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 330 to control various effects.

For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the table stored in the program ROM 331 includes a staging lottery table. The staging lottery table is, for example, a staging related to blowing air using the speaker unit 10 and the blowing mechanism 110 (blower staging), a staging related to light irradiation using the light emitting unit 12 (light irradiation staging), an operation member 2000 or a pressing button 3000. It is used when performing an effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute various effects such as an operation effect (first operation effect, second operation effect) using the random number lottery. When the ventilation effect is executed, at the same time, the sound effect of generating the bass by using the speaker 10c is also executed. The first operation effect is an effect using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A, and the second operation effect is an effect using the press button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B.

Specifically, the staging lottery table can be used for ventilation effect, light irradiation effect, operation effect, etc. A lottery value for determining whether or not to execute each of the effects of the above by a random number lottery (lottery based on a random number range 0 to 99) is defined.

According to such an effect lottery table, regarding the blower effect, if the big hit lottery result is lost, "no effect" is determined by always extracting a random number value from 0 to 99, and in the case of a 4R normal big hit, When a random value of 0 to 30 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random value of 31 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined. In the case of a 16R normal jackpot, 0 to 95 When a random value is extracted, "without effect" is determined, while when a random value of 96 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot, a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted. When it is done, "without effect" is determined, while when a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, when a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted, " While "without effect" is determined, "with effect" is determined when a random number value of 51 to 99 is extracted.

Regarding the light irradiation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is lost, "no effect" is determined when a random value from 0 to 90 is extracted, while "with effect" is obtained when a random value from 91 to 99 is extracted. Is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, "without effect" is determined when a random value from 0 to 90 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value from 91 to 99 is extracted. In the case of 16R normal jackpot, "with effect" is determined by always extracting random values from 0 to 99, and in the case of 4R probability variation jackpot, "without effect" is determined when random values from 0 to 90 are extracted. On the other hand, when a random value of 91 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, "with effect" is determined by always extracting a random value of 0 to 99. ..

Regarding the first operation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is lost, "no effect" is determined when a random number value of 0 to 95 is extracted, while "with effect" is obtained when a random value of 96 to 99 is extracted. Is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, "without effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted. , 16R In the case of a normal jackpot, "without effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted, and a 4R probability variation jackpot is determined. In the case of, "without effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 85 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value of 86 to 99 is extracted, and 0 in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot. When the random values of ~ 95 are extracted, "without effect" is determined, while when the random values of 96 to 99 are extracted, "with effect" is determined.

Regarding the second operation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is lost, "no effect" is always determined by extracting random values from 0 to 99, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, random values from 0 to 97 are extracted. If this is done, "without effect" is determined, while if a random value of 98 to 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted. In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot, "no effect" is determined when a random value from 0 to 90 is extracted, while "no effect" is determined when a random value from 91 to 99 is extracted. Is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, "without effect" is determined when a random value of 0 to 60 is extracted, while "with effect" is determined when a random value of 61 to 99 is extracted. To.

According to such an effect lottery table, the combination patterns in which the effects such as the blower effect, the light irradiation effect, the first operation effect, and the second operation effect occur at the same time are stochastically different depending on the type of loss or jackpot. That is, it is possible to easily guess the type of loss or jackpot according to the combination pattern of the generated effects.

Further, as is clear from the specified contents of the operation effect, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is more than the second operation effect using the press button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B. Has a higher frequency of appearance. That is, since the pressing button 3000 used in the second operation effect is used less frequently than the operation member 2000 used in the first operation effect, the cross button has nothing to do with the operation effect arranged in the vicinity of the press button 3000. In addition to preventing erroneous operation of buttons such as 3100, wiring and boards can be easily specially designed by equipping an independent operation unit with an operation member 2000 that is frequently used.

The work RAM 332 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 330.

The command input port 333 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 and transmits them to the sub CPU 330.

The RTC334 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time to the sub CPU 330. The RTC334 is normally operated by the power supply from the gaming machine main body when the power is supplied to the gaming machine main body, and is a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board (not shown) when the gaming machine main body is turned off. Operated by the power supplied from. As a result, the RTC334 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the gaming machine main body is turned off. The RTC may be operated by a battery provided on the sub control board. Further, as an alternative to the RTC, a counter provided in the work RAM having a function as a backup RAM may be used as a means for measuring the time by counting up at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms).

The display control circuit 335 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 330, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM for storing data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 335 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 335 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 330. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 335 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The sound control circuit 336 is for controlling the sound such as music and sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and is a sound source IC that controls the sound output and a sound data ROM that stores various sound data. , Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the sound signal. The configuration of the acoustic control circuit 336 is also merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and is one from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 330. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The light emission control circuit 337 is for controlling a lamp / LED 260 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a light emission control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the light emission control circuit 337 is also an example only, and is not limited thereto.

The staging device control circuit 338 controls a staging operation such as operating a movable staging accessory or the like in a big hit game state, for example.

<About the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16>
The right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 are formed in a shape substantially symmetrical to each other, and both are configured to include similar members. In the following description, the right side decorative member 15 will be described for convenience.

The right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 produce light when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the right side decorative member 15 has a support member 150, a light emitting substrate (not shown), an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide member 152, and a decorative cover 153. The support member 150, the light emitting substrate, the outer light guide member 151, and the inner light guide member 152 are covered with the decorative cover 153. The main front surface of the decorative cover 153 is translucent or transparent and has light transmission.

The support member 150 and the light emitting substrate are attached to the right base plate 3aa. A light emitting substrate is arranged on the back surface side of the support member 150. A plurality of slits 150a are formed in the support member 150, and a plurality of LEDs (not shown) provided on the light emitting substrate so as to face the plurality of slits 150a are located. An outer light guide member 151 and an inner light guide member 152 are attached to the front portion of the support member 150 so as to be along the plurality of slits 150a. The LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 20 mm to 30 mm) in consideration of securing the amount of light and cost.

The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are each composed of a plate-shaped member, and are formed so that the inner light guide member 152 is larger than the outer light guide member 151. The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are located so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance to the left and right. Since the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 have the same configuration except that the sizes and arrangements are different, the inner light guide member 152 will be described for convenience in the following description.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 29, the inner light guide member 152 has an incident rear end surface 152a serving as a light incident surface and an emitting front end surface 152b serving as a light emitting surface. The incident rear end surface 152a is arranged so as to face a plurality of slits 150a of the support member 150. As a result, the plurality of LEDs are positioned so as to be arranged along the longitudinal direction of the incident rear end surface 152a. The emission front end surface 152b is arranged along the inner surface of the decorative cover 153, and is formed in a curved shape as a whole.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the incident rear end surface 152a is formed with a serrated lens cut so as to form irregularities along the longitudinal direction. As a result, the light from the LED incident on the rear end surface 152a through the slit 150a travels while diffusing in the inner light guide member 152 in the longitudinal direction. The emission front end surface 152b is formed with a so-called diamond-cut lens cut. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end surface 152a to the inside of the inner light guide member 152 is irradiated forward with a certain degree of spread. The emission front end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 is arranged on the front side where the player is located with respect to the emission front end surface of the outer light guide member 151.

According to such a right-side decorative member 15, the light traveling inside the member 15 can be efficiently diffused from the exit front end surface 152b without leaking to the side, and the light is produced so as to effectively stimulate the visual sense. Can be done. Since the left decorative member 16 has the same configuration as the right decorative member 15, the visual sense is effective at the same time as the light effect by the right decorative member 15 or at a timing different from the light effect by the right decorative member 15. Light effects can be performed to stimulate.

<About top decoration 14>
As shown in FIG. 5, the top decoration 14 has a central decoration unit 14a, a right side decoration unit 14b, and a left side decoration unit 14c. The right side decorative unit 14b and the left side decorative unit 14c are formed in a shape substantially symmetrical to each other, and both are configured to include similar members. In the following description, for convenience, the center decoration unit 14a and the right side decoration unit 14b will be described.

[Center decoration unit 14a]
The central decorative unit 14a is, for example, a front-view inverted triangular shape that produces light by emitting light at the start of a big hit. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the central decorative unit 14a includes a main body cover 140, a front cover 141, an upper cover 142, a support member 143, a light emitting substrate 144, a light shielding member 145, and a plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. The support member 143, the light emitting substrate 144, the light shielding member 145, and the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are covered with the main body cover 140, the front cover 141, and the upper cover 142. The front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141 is translucent or transparent and has light transmission. The front surface portion 141a is a protruding surface that is located forward from the lower portion to the upper portion, and is arranged so as to form a translucent surface inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

A support member 143 is attached to the inside of the main body cover 140. A light emitting substrate 144 is attached to the front portion of the support member 143, and a light shielding member 145 is attached so as to be located in front of the light emitting substrate 144. A plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are attached to the lower portion of the light shielding member 145 at predetermined intervals from each other.

A plurality of LEDs 144a corresponding to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are provided in the lower part of the front surface of the light emitting substrate 144, and a plurality of LEDs 144a provided in the upper part of the light shielding member 145 described later are provided in the upper part of the front surface of the light emitting substrate 144. A plurality of LEDs 144b corresponding to the opening 145c of the above are provided.

The light-shielding member 145 is formed with a partition wall 145a so as to partition the upper portion and the lower portion thereof. A plurality of slits 145ba, 145bb, 145bc are formed in the lower portion of the light shielding member 145 so as to correspond to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. A plurality of openings 145c are formed in the upper part of the light-shielding member 145 so that the LED 144b of the light emitting substrate 144 described later is exposed. The upper surface of the partition wall 145a of the light-shielding member 145 is surface-treated so that the light from the LED 144b can be easily reflected forward, and the peripheral edge of the opening 145c is also concave so that the light from the LED 144b can be easily reflected forward. It is formed in a shape.

Each of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is composed of a plate-shaped member, and is formed in a substantially U-shape or a substantially V-shape in front view. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are formed so as to be smaller as they are located above the lower side, the light guide member 146b is smaller than the light guide member 146a, and the light guide member is smaller than the light guide member 146b. The member 146c is smaller. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are positioned so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 34, the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c have incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca, which are light incident surfaces, and emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cab, which are light emission surfaces. The incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca are arranged so as to face the slits 145ba, 145bb, 145bc of the light shielding member 145. The emission front end faces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cc are arranged along the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141 inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

The incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca are formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the longitudinal direction, similarly to the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right side decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light from the LED 144a incident on the incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca travels while diffusing in the light guide members 146a to 146c in the longitudinal direction. The emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cc are formed in a so-called diamond-cut shape, similarly to the emission front end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 of the right side decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca to the inside of the light guide members 146a to 146c is irradiated forward with a certain spread.

According to such a central decoration unit 14a, the light emitted from the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is guided to the outside through the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141. However, since the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc are located relatively close to the front surface portion 141a, and an elongated region having a relatively strong light intensity is formed along the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc. In the lower region of the front cover 141, the light from the emission front end faces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc appears as a plurality of lines. On the other hand, in the upper region of the front cover 141, the light from the plurality of LEDs 144b is diffusely reflected by the peripheral edge of the opening 145c of the light-shielding member 145 and radiated outward through the front portion 141a of the front cover 141. Since the light guide members 146a to 146c are guided to the front surface portion 141a as reflected light from the depth farther from the front surface portion 141a than the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc, the average is in the upper region of the front cover 141. It looks like a wide light distribution with widespread light. That is, from diagonally below the front cover 141, which is the player's line of sight, it seems that line-shaped light emerges three-dimensionally below in the evenly vague light from above.

[Right side decoration unit 14b]
The right-side decoration unit 14b, for example, produces a sound or emits light at the start of a big hit to produce an effect. As shown in FIGS. 35 to 40, the right side decorative unit 14b includes a speaker unit 10A, a main body support member 147A, a main body cover 147B, a front cover 147C, a light emitting substrate 148, and a light guide member 149. The speaker unit 10A and the light emitting substrate 148 are attached to the rear portion of the main body support member 147A, and the light emitting substrate 148 is attached to the front portion of the speaker unit 10A. The light guide member 149 is attached to the inside of the front side of the main body support member 147A and is covered by the front cover 147C. The front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape so that the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the light guide member 149 can be visually recognized from the gap.

The speaker unit 10A has an opening (not shown) that exposes the vibration surface (sound output portion) of the speaker 10b toward the front, and the light emitting substrate 148 is attached along the peripheral edge of the opening. The light emitting substrate 148 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 148a so as to be arranged in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the speaker 10b.

The main body support member 147A is formed with an opening 147Aa to which the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the plurality of LEDs 148a of the light emitting substrate 148 are exposed and the light guide member 149 can be attached to the peripheral edge thereof.

The light guide member 149 is a peripheral edge of the incident rear end surface 149b and the tubular portion 149a which are on the rear side of the peripheral edge of the tubular portion 149a and the tubular portion 149a for guiding the sound generated on the vibration surface of the speaker 10b to the front and serve as a light incident surface. It has an emission front end surface 149c that is on the front side and serves as a light emission surface, and a protrusion 149d that extends forward while extending forward from the peripheral edge of the emission front end surface 149c.

A vibrating surface of the speaker 10b is arranged at the rear portion of the tubular portion 149a, and the sound generated on the vibrating surface is guided forward through the tubular portion 149a. The incident rear end surface 1449b is arranged so as to face the LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148. The incident rear end surface 149b is formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the circumferential direction, similarly to the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right side decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light from the LED 148a incident on the incident rear end surface 149b travels while diffusing the tubular portion 149a in the circumferential direction.

The emission front end surface 149c is located behind the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C by a predetermined distance. The emission front end surface 149c is also formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form irregularities along the circumferential direction, similarly to the incident rear end surface 149b. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end surface 149b to the tubular portion 149a is radiated forward so as to look like a ring while spreading mainly in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.

The protrusion 149d is formed so that a part of both left and right sides partially extends forward, and the tip thereof is arranged so as to abut on the back side of the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. The protruding portion 149d may be arranged so as to be close to the front surface 147Ca without contacting the back side. Further, instead of the protruding portion 149d, the emission front end surface 149c may be arranged so as to be in contact with the back side of the front surface 147Ca, or may be arranged so as to be close to the front end surface.

According to such a right side decoration unit 14b, it is possible to produce an effect in which the surroundings of the speaker 10b appear to shine in a ring shape in accordance with the sound generated from the speaker 10b. Further, since the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, it is easily damaged by an external impact or pressure, but it is reinforced and supported by the protrusion 149d of the light guide member 149. Since it is in a state, it can effectively prevent damage due to external impact or pressure. That is, in the mesh-like (lattice-like) front cover 147C, the sound from the speaker 10b is guided to the back surface of the front cover 147C along the light guide member 149, so that the sound from the speaker 10b is not hindered without spoiling the aesthetic appearance. I can tell the outside.
Further, since the light guide member 149 functions as a support member for the front cover 147C, the rigidity of the front cover 147C can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the configuration of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings, the air flow flows out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e as the sound is output from the speaker 10c. At this time, if the opening / closing member 115 of the blower mechanism 110 is in a state where the space portion 110a is open, the air flow from the opening 10 ec is guided in a direction straight toward the blower port 80, and the air flow from the blower port 80 toward the firing handle 26b. The wind flows with sufficient wind pressure. As a result, the player can feel the wind in the hand holding the firing handle 26b, and can also feel the sound from the speaker 10c as a deep bass due to the Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the air outlet 80 together with the wind.

On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 115 of the ventilation mechanism 110 is in a state where the space portion 110a is closed and the air flow from the opening 10ec is guided to the lower side of the space portion 110a by bending at a substantially right angle, it is under. The wind will be discharged from the vent 8ca of the cover 8c, and the wind will not be guided to the launch handle 26b. As a result, the player can feel only the sound from the speaker 10c as a deep bass by the Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the vent 8ca together with the wind without feeling the wind in the hand holding the firing handle 26b. ..

That is, the speaker unit 10 can be miniaturized and simplified because the bass and the wind can be felt or only the bass can be felt only by switching the direction of the wind flowing out from the opening 10 ec of the speaker unit 10 by the blower mechanism 110. It is possible to flexibly perform the production by sound and wind while trying to achieve the above.

Further, the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the wind coming out from the opening 10 ec of the speaker unit 10 by the blower mechanism 110, and the removable lower right side cover 8ba and the under cover can be felt. Since the air vent 80 and the air vent 8ca may be formed in 8c and individually designed so that the air vent mechanism 110 is arranged between these and the speaker unit 10, the manufacturing cost of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings is high. It can be made excellent in design flexibility and maintainability.

Further, even the speaker unit 10 which is a bass reflex type and has a relatively large volume of the enclosure 10e can be arranged in a space that does not interfere with the hands of the player who handles the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18. , The speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit 10.

Further, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e abuts on the bottom of the upper plate main body 17p and also abuts on the lower left lower 10eb lower plate main body 18p, the upper plate 17p is supported and the enclosure 10e responds to the operation of the speaker 10c. The vibration is transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18, and the clogging of the game balls in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18 can be effectively cleared by this vibration.

Further, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 is set to occur more frequently than the second operation effect using the press button 3000, that is, the operation member 2000 having a high frequency of use operates. The pressing button 3000, which is provided independently on the unit 9A, is provided on the common board 3200, which is also used as the ball lending button 23 and the return button 24. Each of the buttons 3000 can be arranged to simplify the wiring to each board, and thus the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space can be reduced.

Further, while the frequently used operating member 2000 is memorized as a circular shape, the less frequently used pressing button 3000 is easily memorized as a square shape different from the circular shape. Therefore, the operating member 2000 and the pressing button 3000 are memorized according to the frequency of use. Can be provided as an outer shape that makes it easy to distinguish between, and by extension, it is possible to make it easy to use a plurality of operating means. Further, since the square-shaped pressing button 3000 and the cross-shaped cross-shaped button 3100 are arranged adjacent to each other so that some ends of the straight-line portions face each other, a plurality of these are arranged even in a narrow space. Buttons can be placed.

Further, if the conditions for transitioning to a gaming state advantageous for the player such as 16R normal jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot are satisfied, the light irradiation effect is always executed, and at the same time, the ventilation effect may be executed. Can sense that the light irradiation effect or the blast effect is being executed by either the visual sense or the tactile sense on the hand holding the launch handle 26b, and shifts to an advantageous gaming state without overlooking such an effect. You can detect what to do. Further, when the ventilation effect is executed, the sound effect by the deep bass from the speaker 10c is also executed at the same time, and the vibration due to the deep bass can be felt.

Further, for example, in the right decorative member 15, the incident rear end surface 152a of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 is incident while diffusing light in the longitudinal direction in which the LEDs are lined up by a serrated lens cut. While the light travels efficiently in the light guide, the light emitted from the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 at the exit front end surface 152b is a diamond-cut lens that transmits the light guided from the incident rear end surface 152a into the light guide body. Since it can be efficiently scattered to the outside by cutting, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

Further, for example, in the right decorative unit 14b, the protruding portion 149d of the light guide member 149 is arranged so as to abut on the back surface of the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C, and the emission front end surface 149c is separated from the front surface 147Ca by a predetermined distance. Since the speaker 10b is arranged in an annular shape along the peripheral edge so as not to block the vibration surface, the LED 148a located on the incident rear end surface 149b side can be made invisible from the front of the front cover 147C without spoiling the aesthetic appearance. The sound from the speaker 10b can be emitted to the outside without any trouble.

Further, for example, in the central decorative unit 14a, the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are located farther from the light emitting substrate 144 than the peripheral edge of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145 to which the LED 144b is exposed. Since it is arranged near the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141, the light of the LED 144b that is diffusely reflected at the peripheral edge of the opening 145c and guided forward, and the light emitted from the light guide members 146a to 146c through the inside of the exit front end surface 146ab. The light of the LED 144a emitted from the, 146bb, 146cc becomes a light that seems to be diffused on average and a line-shaped light, which can make a clear difference in the visibility of these lights, and by extension, a novel light. It is possible to realize the production of.

As a modification of the ventilation mechanism 110, the one shown in FIG. 41 may be applied. In the ventilation mechanism 110 shown in FIG. 41, a rotatable shutter member 117 that can exclusively open and close the lower part of the space portion 110a and the opening portion 110b is provided. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), the shutter member 117 is positioned so as to form a horizontal posture when guiding the flow of wind from the opening 10 ec (not shown) to the opening 110b. At this time, the wind is not completely guided to the lower part of the space portion 110a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the shutter member 117 guides the flow of wind from the opening 10 ec (not shown) to the lower side of the space portion 110a, the shutter member 117 is rotated from the horizontal posture shown in FIG. 41 (a). It is positioned so that it moves and forms an upright posture. At this time, the flow of the wind that tries to go straight to the side of the space portion 110a is obstructed, and the wind is guided so as to bend downward at a substantially right angle to the lower part of the space portion 110a. According to such a blower mechanism 110, when the wind is guided to the blower port 80 (not shown), the wind is guided to the blower port 80 with sufficient wind pressure without leaking the wind below the space portion 110a. Can be done.

The present invention can also be used for general pachinko gaming machines including enclosed pachinko gaming machines, general pachislot gaming machines, slot machines, roulette machines, and other gaming machines.

The outline of the present invention is listed below based on the present embodiment described above.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker is provided. Also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of downsizing and simplifying a speaker unit for feeling sound and wind.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an opening (for example, an opening 10ec) in an operating means (for example, a launching device 26 or the like) that can be operated by a player and an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A speaker unit provided with (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) and a first direction (for example, a direction straight from the opening 10 ec) and a first direction of an air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker. The air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) capable of switching in two directions (for example, a direction leaving the opening 10 ec and heading downward) is provided, and the direction of the air flow is provided by the air flow direction switching means. Is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided toward the operating means, while the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction by the air flow direction switching means. , A gaming machine characterized in that the air flow is not guided toward the operating means.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided toward the operating means, so that the player operating the operating means feels the wind and the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the air flow is not guided toward the operating means, so the player who operates the operating means feels the wind. Only the sound from the speaker can be felt without making it. That is, the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit. Therefore, the sound and the wind can be felt while reducing the size and simplification of the speaker unit. It is possible to flexibly perform the production by.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the size and simplification of the speaker unit for making the sound and the wind feel.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker is provided. Also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of downsizing and simplifying a speaker unit for feeling sound and wind.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge section (for example, a ventilation port 80 or the like) and a second discharge section (for example, a ventilation port 8ca or the like) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. A state in which the cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.) and the mainstream of the air flow are guided to the first discharge portion (for example, the opening / closing member 115 opens the space portion 110a). Etc.) and an air flow state switching means (for example, a ventilation mechanism 110 or the like) capable of switching to a second state (for example, a state in which the opening / closing member 115 closes the space portion 110a) leading to the second discharge portion. When the first state is switched by the air flow state switching means, the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the first discharge unit, while the second state is guided by the air flow state switching means. When switched to, the gaming machine is characterized in that the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the second discharge unit.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the air flow state switching means is switched to the first state, the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the first discharge section, and the player feels the wind discharged from the first discharge section. At the same time, you can feel the sound from the speaker, but when it is switched to the second state, the mainstream of the air flow is guided toward the second discharge part so that it is not guided to the first discharge part. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel only the sound from the speaker without making the player feel the wind through the first discharging unit. That is, the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the mainstream state of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit. Therefore, the sound can be felt while reducing the size and simplification of the speaker unit. It is possible to flexibly perform the production by the wind.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the size and simplification of the speaker unit for making the sound and the wind feel.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to flow together with the sound to make the wind feel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker is provided. Also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of downsizing and simplifying a speaker unit for feeling sound and wind.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge unit (for example, a blower port 80 or the like) and a second discharge part (for example, a ventilation port 8ca or the like) are provided to further discharge the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. The cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.), the first direction (for example, the direction straight from the opening 10 ec, etc.) leading to the first discharge portion for the main flow of the air flow, and the above. The air flow direction is provided with an air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) capable of switching to a second direction (for example, a direction leaving the opening 10 ec and heading downward) leading to the second discharge portion. When the switching means is switched in the first direction, the main flow of the air flow is linearly guided toward the first discharging portion, while the air flow state switching means is switched in the second direction. If so, the gaming machine is characterized in that the mainstream of the air flow is guided by bending toward the second discharge portion at a substantially right angle.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the main flow of the air flow is linearly guided straight toward the first discharge portion, and the wind discharged from the first discharge portion is blown by the player. While it is possible to feel the sound from the speaker as well as the sound from the speaker, when it is switched to the second direction, the main flow of the air flow is guided to the second discharge part by bending at a substantially right line, so that the first It is not guided to the discharge unit, and the player can feel only the sound from the speaker without making the player feel the wind through the first discharge unit. That is, the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit. Therefore, the sound and the wind can be felt while reducing the size and simplification of the speaker unit. It is possible to flexibly perform the production by.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the size and simplification of the speaker unit for making the sound and the wind feel.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to flow together with the sound to make the wind feel (see, for example, 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker is provided. Also had the drawback of being large and complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of downsizing and simplifying a speaker unit for feeling sound and wind.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge unit (for example, a blower port 80 or the like) and a second discharge part (for example, a ventilation port 8ca or the like) are provided to further discharge the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. The cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.) and the first state (for example, the shutter member 117 is in a horizontal posture and below the space portion 110a) that guides the air flow to the first discharge portion. Air flow state switching means (for example, a state in which the shutter member 117 is in an upright position and the side of the space portion 110a is closed) that can be switched to a second state (for example, a state in which the shutter member 117 is closed) and a second state leading to the second discharge portion (for example). For example, when the first state is switched to the first state by the air flow state switching means, the first discharge unit is provided without the air flow being guided to the second discharge unit. On the other hand, when the air flow is switched to the second state by the air flow state switching means, the air flow is not guided to the first discharge section but is guided to the second discharge section. A featured game machine.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the air flow state is switched to the first state by the air flow state switching means, the air flow is guided to the first discharge section without being guided to the second discharge section, and the wind discharged from the first discharge section. While the player can feel the sound from the speaker as well as the sound from the speaker, when the state is switched to the second state, the air flow is guided to the second discharge part without being guided to the first discharge part. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel only the sound from the speaker without making the player feel the wind through the first discharge unit. That is, the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by exclusively switching the state of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, so that the speaker unit can be miniaturized and simplified. The sound and wind can be produced flexibly.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the size and simplification of the speaker unit for making the sound and the wind feel.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or a speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability. There was a disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a speaker device excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge section (for example, a blower port 80 or the like) and a second discharge section (for example, a vent port 8ca or the like) are provided to further discharge the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. The direction of the cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.) and the air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker is the first direction (for example, the direction straight from the opening 10ec) and The air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) capable of switching to a second direction (for example, a direction leaving the opening 10 ec and heading downward) is provided, and the air flow direction switching means is the speaker unit. When the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction by the air flow direction switching means provided between the cover member and the cover member, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge portion. On the other hand, when the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction by the air flow direction switching means, the game machine is characterized in that the air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge portion, which makes the player feel the wind and also the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge section, so that the player does not feel the wind through the first discharge section from the speaker. You can feel only the sound. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually and appropriately designed so that the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow. Since it may be arranged, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or a speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability. There was a disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a speaker device excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge unit (for example, a blower port 80 or the like) and a second discharge part (for example, a ventilation port 8ca or the like) are provided to further discharge the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. The direction of the cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.) and the air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker is the first direction (for example, the first discharge portion). An air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110) that can be switched between a direction that goes straight from the opening 10 ec and a second direction that is toward the second discharge portion (for example, a direction that goes out of the opening 10 ec and goes downward). Etc.), and the air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and the opening and the first discharge portion are arranged so as to face each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the air flow is guided linearly along one direction.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is linearly guided toward the first discharge portion, which makes the player feel a relatively strong wind and the speaker. On the other hand, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge section, so that the player can feel the wind through the first discharge section. You can feel only the sound from the speaker without feeling. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually and appropriately designed so that the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow. Since it may be arranged, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or a speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability. There was a disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a speaker device excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an opening (for example, an opening 10ec) in an operating means (for example, a launching device 26 or the like) that can be operated by a player and an enclosure (for example, an enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A speaker unit provided with (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) and a first discharge unit (for example, an air outlet 80) for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker to the outside. Etc.) and a cover member (for example, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.) provided with a second discharge portion (for example, vent 8ca, etc.) and an air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker. The direction of is the first direction toward the first discharge portion (for example, the direction straight from the opening 10 ec) and the second direction toward the second discharge portion (for example, exiting the opening 10 ec and heading downward). An air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110, etc.) that can be switched to (direction, etc.) is provided, and the air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and is provided with the opening. The first discharging unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is arranged so as to be located on an extension of a straight line connecting them.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is linearly guided toward the first discharge section, and further, the air flow flows from the first discharge section toward the operating means. By being guided linearly, it is possible to make the player's hand operating the operating means feel a relatively strong wind and also feel the sound from the speaker, while the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction. If this is done, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge unit, so that only the sound from the speaker can be felt without the wind being sent toward the operating means through the first discharge unit. That is, if the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually and appropriately arranged so that the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow. Therefore, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or a speaker unit that emphasizes the bass range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability. There was a disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a speaker device excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) in which an opening (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) is provided in an enclosure (for example, the enclosure 10e or the like) of a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c or the like). A first discharge unit (for example, a blower port 80 or the like) and a second discharge part (for example, a ventilation port 8ca or the like) are provided to further discharge the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. The first flow path (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the undercover 8c, etc.) and the air flow path flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker become the first discharge portion. For example, an air flow path that can be switched to (for example, a flow path that flows straight out of the opening 10 ec) and a second flow path that is toward the second discharge portion (for example, a flow path that exits the opening 10 ec and flows downward). A switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) is provided, and the air flow flow path switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and the first flow path and the second flow path are provided. A game machine characterized by switching exclusively.

According to such a configuration, the air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as the sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the flow path of the air flow is switched to the first flow path, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge portion, which makes the player feel the wind and also the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, if the air flow path is switched to the second flow path, the air flow is not guided toward the first discharge section but is guided toward the second discharge section. , It is possible to make the player feel only the sound from the speaker without making the player feel the wind through the first discharge unit. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually provided so that the sound and the wind can be felt or only the sound can be felt only by exclusively switching the air flow flow path. Since the speaker device may be appropriately designed and arranged, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be made excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the speaker unit is a bass reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit, and there is a problem that it is difficult to efficiently lay out the speaker device. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out a speaker device while securing a space for arranging a speaker unit.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame and the like), a front door that can rotate with respect to the main body frame (for example, a front frame 3 and the like), and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c and the like). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) provided is provided, and the front door is provided with a dish portion (for example, a lower dish 18 or the like) capable of storing a game medium, and the speaker unit is provided. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged on the side of the dish and a part of the machine is arranged so as to protrude above the dish.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume can be arranged so as not to hinder the player's access to the dish, so that the speaker device can be arranged while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit. It can be laid out efficiently.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the speaker unit is a bass reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit, and there is a problem that it is difficult to efficiently lay out the speaker device. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out a speaker device while securing a space for arranging a speaker unit.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame and the like), a front door that can rotate with respect to the main body frame (for example, a front frame 3 and the like), and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c and the like). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) provided is provided, and the front door has an upper plate portion (for example, an upper plate 17 or the like) and a lower plate portion (for example, for example) capable of storing a game medium. A gaming machine characterized in that a lower plate (18, etc.) is provided, and the speaker unit is arranged on the side of the lower plate portion and a part of the speaker unit is arranged so as to abut on the upper plate portion.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume can be arranged so as not to hinder the player's access to the upper plate portion and the lower plate portion, so that the arrangement space of the speaker unit is secured. While doing so, the speaker device can be laid out efficiently. In addition, a part of the speaker unit comes into contact with the upper plate to support the upper plate, and vibration from the speaker unit is transmitted to the upper plate according to the operation of the speaker. It is possible to effectively clear the clogging of the game medium in.

In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, at least a part of the bottom portion of the precision plate portion (for example, the bottom portion of the precision plate main body 17p) is placed on the upper portion of the speaker unit (for example, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e). It is characterized by being in contact with each other.

According to such a configuration, the vibration of the speaker unit is efficiently transmitted from the upper portion to the bottom portion of the upper plate portion, so that it is possible to effectively eliminate the clogging of the game medium accumulated while being in contact with the bottom portion of the upper plate portion. can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional game machine, a bass reflex type speaker unit is provided, the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled, and when the speaker is in a predetermined posture, the through hole provided in the speaker unit is directed toward the handle device. It has been proposed that the wind is made to feel the wind together with the sound by flowing the wind (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the speaker unit is a bass reflex type and has a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large space for arranging the speaker unit, and there is a problem that it is difficult to efficiently lay out the speaker device. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out a speaker device while securing a space for arranging a speaker unit.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame and the like), a front door that can rotate with respect to the main body frame (for example, a front frame 3 and the like), and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c and the like). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) provided is provided, and the front door is provided with a dish portion (for example, a lower dish 18 or the like) capable of storing a game medium, and the speaker unit is provided. , A part (for example, upper left portion 10ea, etc.) is arranged so as to protrude above the dish portion while being arranged on one side of the dish portion, and is open to the other side of the dish portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a space is formed.

According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume does not hinder the player's access to the dish, and access to the dish is possible through the open space formed on the other side of the dish. Since the speaker unit can be arranged so as to be possible, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can participate in the effect has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a drawback that wiring for a plurality of effect buttons becomes complicated as compared with the case where there is only one effect button, which is disadvantageous in terms of manufacturing cost and arrangement space.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying wiring for a plurality of operating means and, by extension, reducing manufacturing costs and placement space. do.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, an operating member 2000, a pressing button 3000, etc.), an effecting means that can perform an effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4, etc.). The plurality of operating means are provided with an operation effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 330 or the like) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute the operation effect by using any of the plurality of operation means. A first operating means (for example, an operating member 2000 or the like) provided at a first position (for example, a position at the center of the upper plate upper cover 8a) and a second position (for example, for example) different from the first position. A second operating means (for example, a pressing button 3000 or the like) provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a to the right, and a third position (for example, upper) different from the first position and the second position. The first operating means and the second operating means include the third operating means (for example, the ball lending button 23, the return button 24, etc.) provided at the position of the right end of the plate upper cover 8a, and the like. It can be operated according to the determination result by the effect determining means, and the first operating means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057 or the like), and the second operating means and the third operation are provided. The means is provided on a second board (for example, a common board 3200 or the like), and the operation effect determining means is derived from the operation effect (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23) using the second operation means. Is also characterized in that it is determined to execute the operation effect (for example, the first operation effect shown in FIG. 23) using the first operation means with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the operation effect using the first operation means has a higher frequency of occurrence than the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high frequency of use. Is provided independently on the first board, while the second operating means, which is relatively infrequently used, is provided on the second board that also serves as the third operating means, so that wiring to the first board and the second board is simplified. As a result, the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space can be reduced.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to simplify the wiring for a plurality of operating means, and to reduce the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can participate in the effect has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the arrangement of the plurality of effect buttons according to the frequency of use is not particularly considered, and this has a problem that the plurality of effect buttons are difficult to use.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily arranging a plurality of operating means.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, an operating member 2000, a pressing button 3000, etc.) and an effecting means that can perform an effect (for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention). A liquid crystal display device 4 or the like) and an operation effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 330 or the like) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute the operation effect by using any of the plurality of operation means. The plurality of operating means are a first operating means (for example, an operating member 2000 or the like) provided in the central portion of the gaming machine, and a second operating means provided at a predetermined position biased to one side from the central portion of the gaming machine. The first operating means and the second operating means include (for example, a pressing button 3000 or the like) and a third operating means (for example, a cross button 3100 or the like) provided at a position adjacent to the predetermined position. It can be operated according to the determination result by the operation effect determining means, and the first operating means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057 or the like), and the second operating means and the first operating means. The 3 operation means are provided on a second board (for example, a common board 3200 or the like), and the operation effect determining means is the operation effect using the second operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23, etc.). ), The gaming machine is characterized in that it is determined to execute the operation effect (for example, the first operation effect shown in FIG. 23, etc.) using the first operation means with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the operation effect using the first operation means has a higher frequency of occurrence than the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high frequency of use. Is provided in the central part of the gaming machine, while the second operating means, which is relatively infrequently used, is provided in a predetermined position biased to one side from the central part of the gaming machine, so that the position is easy to use according to the frequency of use. The first operating means and the second operating means can be arranged, and erroneous operation of the third operating means can be prevented.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, a plurality of operating means can be easily arranged.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, one provided with a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can participate in the effect has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the plurality of effect buttons are all formed in the same outer shape, it is difficult to distinguish them according to the frequency of use, which makes it difficult to use the plurality of effect buttons. there were.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a shape that makes it easy to distinguish between a plurality of operating means and, by extension, making it easy to use the plurality of operating means.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, an operating member 2000, a pressing button 3000, etc.), an effecting means that can perform an effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4, etc.). The plurality of operating means are provided with an operation effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 330 or the like) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute the operation effect by using any of the plurality of operation means. A first operating means (for example, an operating member 2000 or the like) provided at the first position, and a second operating means (for example, a pressing button 3000 or the like) provided at a second position different from the first position. The first operating means and the second operating means include a third operating means (for example, a cross button 3100, etc.) provided at the first position and a third position different from the second position. , The operation effect determination means can be operated according to the determination result, the first operation means is formed in a first outer shape (for example, a circular shape, etc.), and the second operation means is the first. The outer shape is different from the outer shape of the above, and is formed into a second outer shape (for example, a quadrangular shape) including a straight line portion, and the third operating means has an outer shape different from the first outer shape. The second operating means and the third operating means are formed in a third outer shape (for example, a cross shape) including a straight portion so that the straight portions in the respective outer shapes face each other. The operation effect determining means is arranged adjacent to the operation effect using the first operation means rather than the operation effect using the second operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23). A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to execute an effect (for example, the first operation effect shown in FIG. 23) with a relatively high probability.

According to such a configuration, the operation effect using the first operation means has a higher frequency of occurrence than the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high frequency of use. Is remembered as the first outer shape, while the second operating means, which is relatively infrequently used, is remembered as the second outer shape. Therefore, a plurality of operating means are provided as an outer shape that can be easily distinguished according to the frequency of use. This can, in turn, make it easier to use multiple operating means. Further, since the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged adjacent to each other so that the linear portions face each other, these plurality of operating means can be arranged even in a narrow space.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that the first operating means is provided closer to the center of the gaming machine than the second operating means.

According to such a configuration, the first operating means, which is relatively frequently used, can be easily seen by the player, so that it is easier to remember the outer shape of the first operating means than the second operating means. can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make it easy to distinguish a plurality of operating means and, by extension, make it easy to use the plurality of operating means.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine having a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a firing handle has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it is not interesting only by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to see and can perform a novel effect.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, a launching device 26, etc.) and a first effect (for example, FIG. 23) by irradiating light that is visually perceptible toward the operating means. A first effect executing means (for example, a light emitting unit 12 or the like) for executing a light irradiation effect, etc., and a second effect (for example, an air blow effect shown in FIG. 23) by blowing air that can be sensed by touch toward the operating means. Second effect executing means (for example, speaker unit 10, blower mechanism 110, etc.) and effect control means (for example, sub CPU 330, etc.) capable of controlling the first effect and the second effect to be executed at the same time. ), And a game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to such a configuration, the first effect by light irradiation is executed and the second effect by blowing air is executed at the same time, and the player can produce the effect by either light irradiation or blowing with the hand operating the operating means. Since it is possible to detect that is being executed, the player can recognize the effect without overlooking it, and can execute a novel effect.

In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the operating means is a launching handle (eg, launching handle 26b, etc.) capable of launching a game ball on a gaming board (eg, gaming board 1 or the like) provided in the gaming machine. It is characterized by being.

According to such a configuration, since the firing handle is gripped during the game, it is possible to make it easier for the player holding the firing handle to recognize the tactile effect, and the effect to be performed is not missed. Can be surely recognized.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible for a player to easily see and perform a novel effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine having a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a firing handle has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it is not interesting only by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to see and can perform a novel effect.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, a launching device 26, etc.) and a first effect (for example, FIG. 23) by irradiation of light that can be visually perceived toward the operating means. A first effect executing means (for example, a light emitting unit 12 or the like) for executing a light irradiation effect, etc., and a second effect (for example, an air blow effect shown in FIG. 23) by blowing air that can be sensed by touch toward the operating means. A gaming machine including a second effect executing means (for example, a speaker unit 10, a blower mechanism 110, etc.) for executing the second effect executing means, wherein the second effect executing means is an enclosure (for example, a speaker 10c, etc.) of a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c, etc.). For example, a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) provided with a barrier (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) (such as an enclosure 10e) and an air flow flowing out from the barrier when the speaker is operated are further discharged to the outside. A cover member (for example, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.) provided with a first discharge portion (for example, an air outlet 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, a ventilation port 8ca, etc.). The direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker is switched between the first direction (for example, the direction straight from the opening 10 ec) and the second direction (for example, the direction leaving the opening 10 ec and going downward). When the air flow direction switching means is provided with a possible air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) and the air flow direction is switched to the first direction by the air flow direction switching means, the first discharge unit is provided. While the air flow is guided toward the direction, when the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction by the air flow direction switching means, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion. The air flow discharged from the first discharging unit can reach the operating means, and the air flow discharged from the second discharging unit cannot reach the operating means. Game machine.

According to such a configuration, the first effect by light irradiation is executed and the second effect by blowing air is executed at the same time, or the first effect is executed but the air flow does not reach the operating means. 2 The effect can be prevented from being executed, and the player can sense that the effect is being executed by either light irradiation or ventilation at the part where the operating means is operated, so that the player can perform the effect. You can recognize it without overlooking it, and you can perform a novel production.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible for a player to easily see and perform a novel effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine having a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a firing handle has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a drawback that it is not interesting only by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to see and can perform a novel effect.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operating means that can be operated by a player (for example, a launching device 26, etc.) and a first effect (for example, FIG. 23) by irradiation of light that can be visually perceived toward the operating means. A first effect executing means (for example, a light emitting unit 12 or the like) that executes a light irradiation effect) and a second effect (for example, an air blow effect shown in FIG. 23) that can be sensed by tactile sensation toward the operating means. A gaming machine including a second effect executing means (for example, a speaker unit 10, a blower mechanism 110, etc.) for executing the second effect executing means, wherein the second effect executing means is an enclosure (for example, a speaker 10c, etc.) of a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c, etc.). For example, a speaker unit (for example, a speaker unit 10 or the like) provided with a barrier (for example, an opening 10 ec or the like) (such as an enclosure 10e) and an air flow flowing out from the barrier when the speaker is operated are further discharged to the outside. A cover member (for example, lower right side cover 8ba, undercover 8c, etc.) provided with a first discharge portion (for example, a blower port 80, etc.) and a second discharge portion (for example, a ventilation port 8ca, etc.). The direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening due to the operation of the speaker is switched between the first direction (for example, the direction straight from the opening 10 ec) and the second direction (for example, the direction leaving the opening 10 ec and going downward). A possible air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110 or the like) is provided, and the air flow directed in the first direction is guided to be discharged from the first discharge portion, and the first discharge portion is provided. The air flow discharged from the unit can reach the operating means, and the air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and the opening and the first discharging unit are The gaming machine is arranged so as to face each other, and the air flow is linearly guided along the first direction.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect by blowing air at the same time as executing the first effect by light irradiation, and the player can perform either light irradiation or blowing at the part where the operating means is operated. Since it is possible to sense that the effect is being executed, the player can recognize the effect without overlooking it, and can execute a novel effect. Further, when the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening is set to the first direction, the air flow can be linearly guided from the barrier of the enclosure to the first discharge portion, so that the air flow discharged from the first discharge portion can be guided. Can be efficiently reached to the operating means, and the part of the player who operates the operating means can be surely blown and felt.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible for a player to easily see and perform a novel effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of a light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from an end portion of the light guide plate (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-228979).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs and the like) and a light guide plate (for example, an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide) that incidentally emits light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. The light guide plate includes a member (152, etc.), and the light guide plate is located on an incident end surface (for example, an incident rear end surface 152a, etc.) on which light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident, and light located on the opposite side of the incident end surface. The plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be arranged along the incident end surface, and the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in the incident end surface. A first lens cut (eg, a serrated lens cut, etc.) is formed that diffuses the light in the direction, and the exit end face scatters the light incident on the incident end face and guided outward. A gaming machine characterized in that a second lens cut (for example, a diamond-cut lens cut or the like) is formed.

According to such a configuration, at the incident end surface of the light guide plate, the light is efficiently diffused in the light guide plate by incident while diffusing the light in the direction in which a plurality of light emitting means are lined up, while the light is emitted from the light guide plate. At the end face, the light guided from the incident end face into the light guide plate can be efficiently scattered outward, so that color unevenness can be eliminated and the light can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of a light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from an end portion of the light guide plate (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-228979).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs and the like) and a light guide plate (for example, an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide) that incidentally emits light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. The light guide plate includes a member (152, etc.), and the light guide plate is located on an incident end surface (for example, an incident rear end surface 152a, etc.) on which light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident, and light located on a side opposite to the incident end surface. The plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be arranged along the incident end surface, and the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in the incident end surface. A gaming machine characterized in that a serrated lens cut is formed so as to diffuse light in a direction.

According to such a configuration, at the incident end surface of the light guide plate, the light is efficiently diffused in the light guide plate by diffusing the light in the direction in which a plurality of light emitting means are lined up by the serrated lens cut. It is possible to eliminate unevenness and irradiate light efficiently.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of a light guide plate by diffusely reflecting light from an LED introduced from an end portion of the light guide plate (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-228979).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the directivity of the LED as a light emitting element is strong, there is a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating color unevenness and efficiently irradiating light.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs and the like) and a plurality of light guide plates (for example, outer light guide member 151, inner side) that incident and emit light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. The light guide plate (152, etc.) is provided, and the plurality of light guide plates are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction, and each of the plurality of light guide plates has an incident end face (incident end face) to which light from the plurality of light emitting means is incident. For example, it has an incident rear end surface 152a and the like) and an emission end surface (for example, an emission front end surface 152b and the like) that is located on the opposite side of the incident end surface and emits light, and the emission end surfaces of the plurality of light guide plates are The plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be lined up along the incident end face, and the incident end face diffuses light in the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are lined up. 1 lens cut (for example, a serrated lens cut or the like) is formed, and the emission end surface has a shape different from that of the first lens cut, and the light incident on the incident end surface and guided is emitted. A gaming machine characterized in that a second lens cut (for example, a diamond-cut lens cut or the like) that scatters outward is formed.

According to such a configuration, since the distances from the emission end faces of the plurality of light guide plates to the player are different, the degree of light scattering is different for each light guide plate, and various decorative effects can be exhibited. .. Further, on the emission end faces of the plurality of light guide plates, the light guided from the incident end face into the light guide plate by the second lens cut can be efficiently scattered outward, so that the color unevenness is eliminated and the light is emitted. Can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to eliminate color unevenness and efficiently irradiate light.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly shown to the player. Since it can be seen, there was a drawback that it spoiled the aesthetics.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of transmitting the sound from a speaker to the outside without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is arranged in front of a speaker (for example, a speaker 10b or the like) having a sound output portion capable of generating sound (for example, a vibration surface of the speaker 10b) and the sound output portion. Performs light emission effect with a speaker cover (for example, front cover 147C, etc.) in which a plurality of openings (for example, the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C, etc.) that can transmit the sound from the sound portion to the outside are formed. A possible light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.) is provided, and the light emitting unit is incident with a light emitting means (for example, LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148) and the light emitted by the light emitting means. A light guide member (for example, a light guide member 149 or the like) having an incident portion (for example, an incident rear end surface 149b or the like) and an emission portion (for example, an emission front end surface 149c or the like) that emits light from the incident portion to the outside. The game machine is characterized in that a part of the light guide member (for example, a protruding portion 149d or the like) is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the back surface of the speaker cover.

According to such a configuration, a part of the light guide member is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the back surface of the speaker cover, and the sound is guided to the speaker cover along the light guide member, which impairs the aesthetic appearance. The sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any problem. Further, since the light guide member functions as a support member for the speaker cover, the rigidity of the speaker cover can be increased.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any trouble without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly shown to the player. Since it can be seen, there was a drawback that it spoiled the aesthetics.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of transmitting the sound from a speaker to the outside without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a speaker (for example, the vibration surface of the speaker 10b) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (for example, the vibration surface of the speaker 10b) and a light emitting unit capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emitting). The light emitting unit includes a substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.), and the light emitting unit includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148) and an incident portion (for example, an incident rear end surface) on which the light emitted by the light emitting means is incident. 149b, etc.) and a light guide member (for example, a light guide member 149, etc.) having an emission portion (for example, an emission front end surface 149c, etc.) that emits light from the incident portion to the outside, and said the light guide. The member is a gaming machine characterized in that the emitting portion is arranged in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the sound emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the emitting portion of the light guide member is arranged in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the light emitting portion so as not to block the sound output portion of the speaker, so that the sound from the speaker is not hindered from the outside without spoiling the aesthetic appearance. I can tell you.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any trouble without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, as a conventional gaming machine, a machine in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem that the sound generated from the speaker cone is blocked, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly shown to the player. Since it can be seen, there was a drawback that it spoiled the aesthetics.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of transmitting the sound from a speaker to the outside without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is arranged in front of a speaker (for example, a speaker 10b or the like) having a sound output portion capable of generating sound (for example, a vibration surface of the speaker 10b) and the sound output portion. A speaker cover (for example, front cover 147C, etc.) having a lattice surface (for example, the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C, etc.) formed so that the sound from the sound unit can be transmitted to the outside, and light emission effect can be executed. A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.) is provided, and the light emitting unit includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148) and an incident portion for incident light emitted by the light emitting means. A light guide member (for example, a light guide member 149 or the like) having an emitting portion (for example, an emission front end surface 149c or the like) that emits light from the incident portion to the outside (for example, an incident rear end surface 149b or the like). The light guide member includes a first light guide portion (for example, a tubular portion 149a or the like) in which the emission portion is arranged along the peripheral edge of the sound output portion at a predetermined distance from the lattice surface, and the light guide member. A gaming machine characterized in that the emitting portion includes a second light guide portion (for example, a protruding portion 149d or the like) arranged at a position closer to the lattice surface than the emitting portion of the first light guide portion. ..

According to such a configuration, the exit portion of the first light guide portion is arranged along the peripheral edge of the sound output portion of the speaker at a predetermined distance from the lattice surface of the speaker cover, while the exit portion of the second light guide portion is emitted. Since the unit is arranged close to the grid surface of the speaker cover, the light from the same light source is emitted from a plurality of different emission surfaces in the depth direction, and even if the same light source is used, various decorative lights can be emitted. It can be realized, and the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any hindrance without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any trouble without spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright according to the transmittance of the two lenses. Those that appear dark on the other adjacent side have been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-87778).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the emission surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the emitted light is mixed and the effect of slowing or slowing the visibility is effective. There was a drawback that it could not be demonstrated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a clear difference in light visibility and, by extension, realizing a novel light effect. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in front of a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.), a substrate provided with the plurality of light emitting means (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light emitting members (for example, light shielding members 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) are provided, and the plurality of light emitting means include a first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b, etc.) and the first light emitting means. The plurality of light guide members include a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a or the like) arranged at a different position from the above, and the plurality of light guide members have a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting unit that guides the light from the first light emitting means forward while scattering the light. For example, a first light guide member (for example, a light shielding member 145 or the like) having an opening (such as a peripheral portion of an opening 145c) and an emission portion (for example, an emission front end) that diffuses light from the second light emitting means and emits light forward. A second light guide member (for example, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cc) is included, and the reflective portion of the first light guide member has a distance from the substrate of the first distance. The gaming machine is characterized in that the emitting portion of the second light guide member is arranged at a position where the distance from the substrate is a second distance farther than the reflecting portion.

According to such a configuration, the emitting portion of the second light guide member is arranged at a distance farther from the substrate provided with the light emitting means than the reflecting portion of the first light guide member, so that the emitting portion is from the reflecting portion and the emitting portion. It is possible to make a clear difference in the visibility of the light guided to the front, which makes it possible to realize a novel light effect.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright according to the transmittance of the two lenses. Those that appear dark on the other adjacent side have been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-87778).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the emission surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the emitted light is mixed and the effect of slowing or slowing the visibility is effective. There was a drawback that it could not be demonstrated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a clear difference in light visibility and, by extension, realizing a novel light effect. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in front of a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.), a substrate provided with the plurality of light emitting means (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light guide members (for example, light shielding members 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.), and a translucent front cover (for example, front cover 141, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members. A gaming machine including a decorative device (for example, a central decorative unit 14a or the like), wherein the decorative device is attached to an upper portion of the gaming machine, and the plurality of light emitting means are first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b). Etc.) and a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a or the like) arranged at a position different from the first light emitting means, and the plurality of light guide members scatter light from the first light emitting means. A first light guide member (for example, a light shielding member 145 or the like) having a reflecting portion (for example, a peripheral portion of an opening 145c) that guides the light forward while diffusing the light from the second light emitting means to the front. The front cover includes a plurality of second light guide members (for example, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having an emission portion (for example, front end faces of emission 146ab, 146bb, 146cc), and the front cover is directed with respect to the vertical direction. The front cover has an inclined translucent surface (for example, front portion 141a, etc.) that protrudes forward from the lower portion to the upper portion thereof, and the plurality of second light guide members are formed in a plate shape and are formed in a plate shape. A gaming machine characterized in that the emitting portions are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other with a predetermined interval in the thickness direction, and the emitting portions are arranged along the back surface of the translucent surface.

According to such a configuration, since the emission portions of the plurality of second light guide members are arranged along the inclined light-transmitting surface of the front cover, the light from the reflection portion of the first light guide member and the plurality of light sources are plurality. It is possible to make a clear difference in visibility from the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second light guide member, and thereby it is possible to realize a novel light effect. Further, when the player looks up, the emission portions of the plurality of second light guide members do not overlap each other, and each emission portion can be reliably visually recognized through the translucent surface, thereby enhancing the light effect. can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as an image effect using a liquid crystal display device, a light effect using an LED, and a speaker. It is configured to perform various effects such as a sound effect using the above, or a physical action effect using a movable device.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright according to the transmittance of the two lenses. Those that appear dark on the other adjacent side have been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-87778).

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the emission surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the emitted light is mixed and the effect of slowing or slowing the visibility is effective. There was a drawback that it could not be demonstrated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a clear difference in light visibility and, by extension, realizing a novel light effect. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in front of a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a, 144b, etc.), a substrate provided with the plurality of light emitting means (for example, a light emitting substrate 144, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light guide members (for example, light shielding members 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.), and a translucent front cover (for example, front cover 141, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members. The plurality of light emitting means include a first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b or the like) and a second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a or the like) arranged at a position different from the first light emitting means. The plurality of light guide members include a first light guide member (for example, a light shielding member 145 and the like) having a reflecting portion (for example, a peripheral portion of an opening 145c) that scatters light from the first light emitting means and guides the light forward. ), The incident end surface on which the light from the second light emitting means is incident (for example, the incident rear end surface 146aa, 146ba, 146ca), and the emission end surface (for example, the emission front end surface) that emits light while diffusing the light from the incident end surface. The front cover includes a second light guide member (eg, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having 146ab, 146bb, 146cc), and the front cover has a translucent surface (for example, front portion 141a, etc.). The second light guide member is formed of a flat plate-shaped light guide member whose emission end surface is arranged along the back surface of the light transmission surface, and the incident end surface emits light into the inside of the second light guide member. A first lens cut is formed to diffuse the light in the longitudinal direction of a flat plate, and the emitted end surface has a shape different from that of the first lens cut and is outside the light that is incident on the incident end surface and guided. A gaming machine characterized in that a second lens cut that diffuses toward it is formed.

According to such a configuration, the exit end surface which is one end surface of the flat plate-shaped second light guide member is arranged along the inclined light transmitting surface of the front cover, and the incident end surface of the second light guide member is arranged. A first lens cut that diffuses light in the longitudinal direction of a flat plate is formed, while a second lens cut that diffuses light outward in a shape different from that of the first lens cut is formed on the emission end face. Is formed, the second light guide member efficiently diffuses the light from the light emitting means to the light emitting end surface via the incident end surface and guides the light to the translucent surface, while the first light guide member transmits the reflected light. Since it can be guided to the translucent surface, it is possible to make a clear difference in the visibility of these lights, and it is possible to realize a novel light effect. Further, in the second light guide member, the light is incident while being diffused in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate by the first lens cut of the incident end face, and the light efficiently advances to the inside of the second light guide member in the flat plate shape. On the other hand, on the exit end surface of the second light guide member, the light guided from the incident end surface to the inside can be efficiently diffused to the outside, so that the color unevenness is eliminated and the light is efficiently irradiated. Can be done.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

<About others>
As the gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-152832 is also known. However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have the configuration and function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Hereinafter, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 according to the present embodiment will be described.

[First accessory device 4000]
First, the first accessory device 4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 59. The first accessory device 4000 performs the staging by moving the staging member (lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like described later). The first accessory device 4000 mainly includes a frame body 4100, a lower movable effect accessory 4200, a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300, an upper movable effect accessory 4400, and an upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500.

[Frame body 4100]
The frame body 4100 shown in FIGS. 42 to 47 is a structure for supporting the lower movable staging accessory 4200, the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300, and the like, which will be described later. The frame body 4100 is formed into a substantially rectangular frame shape with an open center in front view by combining plate-shaped members and the like.

[Lower movable production character 4200]
The lower movable effecting accessory 4200 shown in FIGS. 42 to 44 and 48 to 50 is to perform an effect using the lower rotating decorative body 4210 described later in the lower part of the first accessory device 4000. The lower movable staging object 4200 mainly includes a lower rotation decoration body 4210 and a lower rotation drive mechanism 4220.

[Lower rotating decorative body 4210]
The lower rotating decorative body 4210 shown in FIGS. 48 to 52 is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The lower rotating decoration body 4210 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. Specifically, the lower rotating decoration body 4210 mainly includes a first surface 4211, a second surface 4212, a third surface 4213, a fourth surface 4214, a left side surface 4215, and a right side surface 4216.

The first surface 4211 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In the initial state (see FIG. 1) described later, the first surface 4211 is directed forward. The first surface 4211 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The first surface 4211 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The first surface 4211 is appropriately decorated (characters, figures, characters, etc.).

The second surface 4212 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed (opposite) on the opposite side to the first surface 4211. In the initial state described later, the second surface 4212 is directed to the rear. The second surface 4212 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The second surface 4212 is formed so as to have substantially the same area as the first surface 4211. The second surface 4212 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The second surface 4212 is provided with an appropriate decoration (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decoration formed on the first surface 4211. Specifically, the second surface 4212 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 described later (for example, the second surface of the upper rotating decoration body 4410). English words that make one meaning when combined with the decoration on the 4412 (for example, the letters "BIG" on the second side 4412 and "BONUS" on the second side 4212 are combined to form "BIG BONUS". English words that make up the meaning of)) etc.) are applied. A protrusion 4212a is formed on the second surface 4212.

The protrusion 4212a is a portion formed so as to protrude from the surface of the second surface 4212. The protrusions 4212a are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212, respectively. Strictly speaking, the protruding portion 4212a is formed by projecting the upper and lower ends of the rear side portions of the left side surface 4215 and the right side surface 4216, which will be described later, to the rear. The protruding portion 4212a is formed so that the rear end portion has a planar shape substantially parallel to the second surface 4212. The projecting portion 4212a projects rearward from the second surface 4212 to such an extent that the planar rear end portion is located rearward from the decoration formed on the second surface 4212.

The third surface 4213 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface adjacent to the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. In the initial state described later, the third surface 4213 is directed upward. The third surface 4213 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The third surface 4213 is formed so as to have a smaller area than the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. Specifically, the front-rear width of the third surface 4213 is formed to be smaller than the vertical width of the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. The third surface 4213 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The third surface 4213 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. Specifically, the third surface 4213 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 described later (for example, the third surface of the upper rotating decoration body 4410). A pattern that forms an integral shape together with the decoration given to 4413) is applied. A decorative through hole 4213a is formed on the third surface 4213.

The decorative through hole 4213a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the third surface 4213. The decorative through hole 4213a is formed so as to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the third surface 4213. As a result, the decorative through hole 4213a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the third surface 4213. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are communicated with each other through the decorative through hole 4213a. The heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released (heated) to the outside through the decorative through hole 4213a.

The fourth surface 4214 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed (opposite) on the opposite side to the third surface 4213. In the initial state described later, the fourth surface 4214 is directed downward. The fourth surface 4214 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The fourth surface 4214 is formed so as to have substantially the same area as the third surface 4213 (an area smaller than the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212). The fourth surface 4214 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The fourth surface 4214 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. A decorative through hole 4214a and an engaging recess 4214b are formed on the fourth surface 4214.

The decorative through hole 4214a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the fourth surface 4214. The decorative through hole 4214a is formed so as to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the fourth surface 4214. As a result, the decorative through hole 4214a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the fourth surface 4214. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are communicated with each other through the decorative through hole 4214a. The heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released (heated) to the outside through the decorative through hole 4214a.

The engaging recess 4214b (see FIGS. 50 and 53) is a recess formed so as to dent the surface of the fourth surface 4214. The engaging recesses 4214b are formed at the front and rear center portions of the left and right ends of the fourth surface 4214, respectively. The engaging recess 4214b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom surface. The engaging recess 4214b mainly includes a bottom surface 4214c, an inclined surface 4214d, and a through hole 4214e.

The bottom surface 4214c is a flat portion formed at the bottom of the engaging recess 4214b. The bottom surface 4214c is formed substantially parallel to the surface of the fourth surface 4214.

The inclined surface 4214d is a side surface of the engaging recess 4214b (a surface connecting the surface of the fourth surface 4214 and the bottom surface 4214c of the engaging recess 4214b). More specifically, the inclined surface 4214d is a pair of front and rear side surfaces among the side surfaces of the engaging recess 4214b. The pair of inclined surfaces 4214d are inclined so as to be separated from each other (the front-rear width gradually widens) from the bottom surface 4214c side of the engaging recess 4214b toward the surface side of the fourth surface 4214 (the opening side of the engaging recess 4214b). is doing.

The through hole 4214e is a hole formed so as to penetrate the bottom surface 4214c. The through hole 4214e is formed so as to penetrate substantially half of the bottom surface 4214c. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are communicated with each other through the through hole 4214e. Through the through hole 4214e, the heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released (heated) to the outside.

The left side surface 4215 is one of the six surfaces (left side surface) of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left side surface 4215 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The rear end portion of the left side surface 4215 forms the protruding portion 4212a of the above-mentioned second surface 4212. Further, a cylindrical protrusion 4215a, a central through hole 4215b, and an engagement hole 4215c are formed on the left side surface 4215.

The tubular protrusion 4215a is a portion formed so as to protrude from the center of the left side surface 4215 toward the left. The tubular protrusion 4215a is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape (bottomed tubular shape) with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right.

The central through hole 4215b is a hole formed so as to penetrate the center of the left side surface of the tubular protrusion 4215a. The central through hole 4215b is formed in the shape of a circular side view.

The engagement hole 4215c is a hole formed so as to penetrate the left side surface of the tubular protrusion 4215a. Three engaging holes 4215c are formed around the central through hole 4215b at equal intervals.

The right side surface 4216 is one surface (right side surface) of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The right side surface 4216 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The rear end portion of the right side surface 4216 forms the protrusion 4212a of the above-mentioned second surface 4212. Further, a through hole 4216a is formed on the right side surface 4216.

The through hole 4216a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the center of the right side surface 4216. The through hole 4216a is formed in the shape of a circular side view.

[Lower rotation drive mechanism 4220]
The lower rotation drive mechanism 4220 shown in FIGS. 48 to 57 rotates and drives the lower rotation decoration body 4210. The lower rotation drive mechanism 4220 mainly includes a left side case 4221, a motor 4222, an output gear 4223, a driven gear 4224, a right side case 4225, and a rotation shaft portion 4226.

The left case 4221 supports the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and houses various parts. The left case 4221 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The left case 4221 is formed of a plurality of members. In FIG. 55, a part of the left side case 4221 is omitted, and the inside of the left side case 4221 is shown. The left case 4221 mainly includes a through hole 4221a, a sliding portion 4221b, and a holding portion 4221c.

The through hole 4221a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the right side surface of the left side case 4221. The through hole 4221a is formed in a side view circular shape.

The sliding portion 4221b is a portion that is slidably in contact with the left rail member 4310, which will be described later. The sliding portion 4221b is formed in a groove shape in which the left portion of the rear surface of the left side case 4221 is recessed vertically.

The sandwiching portion 4221c is a portion for connecting the left side case 4221 to the belt 4333 described later. The sandwiching portion 4221c is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The sandwiching portion 4221c is fixed to the left end portion of the left side case 4221 from the front. The sandwiching portion 4221c can connect the left side case 4221 to the belt 4333 by sandwiching the belt 4333, which will be described later, with the left side case 4221.

The motor 4222 is a drive source for rotating the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The motor 4222 is arranged inside the left case 4221. An output shaft (not shown) of the motor 4222 is provided so as to project to the left.

The output gear 4223 is a spur gear that is rotated by a driving force from the motor 4222. The output gear 4223 is arranged inside the left case 4221. The output gear 4223 is arranged on the left side of the motor 4222 with the rotation axis direction facing left and right. The output gear 4223 is connected to the output shaft of the motor 4222.

The driven gear 4224 is a spur gear that is rotated by a driving force from the output gear 4223. The driven gear 4224 is arranged inside the left case 4221. Specifically, the driven gear 4224 is formed with a main body portion 4224a, a through hole 4224b, and a protrusion 4224c.

The main body portion 4224a is a portion formed in the shape of a spur gear. The main body portion 4224a is arranged above the output gear 4223 with the rotation axis direction facing the left-right direction. The main body portion 4224a is arranged so as to mesh with the output gear 4223.

The through hole 4224b is a hole formed so as to penetrate the main body portion 4224a to the left and right. The through hole 4224b is formed in the center of the main body portion 4224a.

The protrusion 4224c is a portion formed so as to project from the right side surface of the main body 4224a to the right. Three protrusions 4224c are formed around the through hole 4224b at equal intervals. The protrusion 4224c is formed at a position corresponding to the engagement hole 4215c of the lower rotating decoration body 4210.

The right case 4225 supports the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The right case 4225 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The left case 4221 is formed of a plurality of members. The right case 4225 mainly includes a sliding portion 4225a and a holding portion 4225b.

The sliding portion 4225a is a portion slidably connected to the right rail member 4320, which will be described later. The sliding portion 4225a is formed on the rear surface of the right side case 4225. The sliding portion 4225a is formed in a substantially rectangular cylinder shape extending vertically.

The sandwiching portion 4225b is a portion for connecting the right side case 4225 to the belt 4343 described later. The sandwiching portion 4225b is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The sandwiching portion 4225b is fixed to the right end portion of the right side case 4225 from the front. The sandwiching portion 4225b can connect the right side case 4225 to the belt 4343 by sandwiching the belt 4343, which will be described later, with the right side case 4225.

The rotation shaft portion 4226 shown in FIGS. 54, 56 and 57 is for rotatably supporting the lower rotation decoration body 4210 and for causing the lower rotation decoration body 4210 to emit light. The rotating shaft portion 4226 mainly includes a fixed shaft 4226a, a connecting portion 4226b, a front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c, a rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d, and a light emitting substrate 4226e.

The fixed shaft 4226a is a substantially columnar member. The fixed shaft 4226a is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the left and right.

The connecting portion 4226b is for connecting the fixed shaft 4226a with the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d, which will be described later. The connecting portion 4226b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The connecting portion 4226b is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the left and right. The left end of the connecting portion 4226b is fixed to the right end of the fixed shaft 4226a.

The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c forms a rotation shaft for rotatably supporting the lower rotation decoration body 4210. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape in which the cylinder is halved along the axis). The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is provided with a curved surface (a surface formed in a semicircular shape in a side view), ribs formed for reinforcement, and the like. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is arranged with its curved surface facing forward. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is formed of a light-transmitting material, and can diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 4226e (LED4226i) described later.

The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d forms a rotating shaft for rotatably supporting the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape in which the cylinder is halved along the axis). The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d includes a curved surface (a surface formed in a semicircular shape in a side view), a plurality of openings 4226h formed on the curved surface, ribs formed for reinforcement, and the like. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is arranged with its curved surface facing rearward.

The light emitting substrate 4226e is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The light emitting substrate 4226e is arranged with its plate surface facing back and forth and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. On the front surface of the light emitting substrate 4226e, a plurality of LEDs 4226i are provided over substantially the entire left and right sides of the light emitting substrate 4226e. By emitting light from the LED 4226i, it is possible to irradiate the front of the light emitting substrate 4226e with light.

The light emitting substrate 4226e is fixed to the connecting portion 4226b via the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d. Specifically, the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d are fixed to each other so as to sandwich the light emitting substrate 4226e from the front and back. At this time, the connecting portion 4226b is also sandwiched between the left end portions of the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d. In this way, the connecting portion 4226b and the light emitting substrate 4226e are sandwiched between the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d, so that the light emitting substrate 4226e is fixed to the connecting portion 4226b.

By combining the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d in this way, a substantially cylindrical member (rotating shaft portion 4226) is formed. A substantially cylindrical left collar 4226f and a right collar 4226g are fitted in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the rotating shaft portion 4226, respectively.

<About the lower rotation decoration body 4210 and the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220>
As shown in FIG. 58, the rotation shaft portion 4226 configured in this way is inserted into the inside of the lower rotation decoration body 4210 through the through hole 4216a of the lower rotation decoration body 4210. At this time, since the rotating shaft portion 4226 is formed so as to have a circular cross section (substantially cylindrical), it is easy to align the rotating shaft portion 4216a with respect to the side view circular through hole 4216a (and by extension, the lower rotating decorative body 4210). Can be done.

The fixed shaft 4226a provided at the left end of the rotating shaft portion 4226 is inserted into the central through hole 4215b of the lower rotating decoration body 4210, and is arranged so as to project to the left from the central through hole 4215b.

In the state of being arranged in this way, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical protrusion 4215a of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion 4226 via the left collar 4226f, and the lower portion is rotatably supported. The inner peripheral surface of the through hole 4216a of the rotating decoration body 4210 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion 4226 via the right collar 4226g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the left end portion of the fixed shaft 4226a of the rotating shaft portion 4226 is inserted into the through hole 4224b of the driven gear 4224 and fixed to the left side case 4221. At this time, the driven gear 4224 can rotate relative to the fixed shaft 4226a. Further, the right end portion of the rotating shaft portion 4226 is fixed to the right side case 4225.

Further, the protrusion 4224c of the driven gear 4224 is fitted (engaged) into the engagement hole 4215c formed in the cylindrical protrusion 4215a of the lower rotating decoration body 4210. As a result, when the driven gear 4224 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4222, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 rotates around the rotating shaft portion 4226 with the rotation of the driven gear 4224. At this time, since the rotation shaft portion 4226 is fixed to the left side case 4221 and the right side case 4225, it does not rotate.

In this way, by appropriately driving the motor 4222, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be rotated and the desired surface can be turned forward. Since light can always be emitted forward from the light emitting substrate 4226e inside the lower rotating decoration body 4210, the front surface of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 can be made to emit bright light. The rotation position of the lower rotation decoration body 4210 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the lower rotation decoration body 4210 is rotated to an arbitrary rotation position based on the detection value of the sensor. Can be done. Further, each LED 4226i can be controlled separately, and it is possible to control light emission according to the surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 facing the front. With such a configuration, the light emitting substrate 4226e also rotates according to the lower rotating decorative body 4210, and a plurality of light emitting substrates 4226e are provided as compared with the case where the same number of light emitting substrates 4226e as the number of faces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is provided. It is not necessary to arrange it, and the cost can be reduced.

[Lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300]
The lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 shown in FIGS. 43 to 47 drives the lower movable staging accessory 4200 up and down. The lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 mainly includes a left rail member 4310, a right rail member 4320, a left drive mechanism 4330, and a right drive mechanism 4340.

[Left rail member 4310]
The left rail member 4310 guides the lower movable staging object 4200 up and down. The left rail member 4310 is formed in a rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. On the front surface of the left rail member 4310, a rail 4311 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion to the upper and lower centers is formed. The left rail member 4310 is fixed to the left portion of the frame body 4100 so as to extend vertically.

[Right rail member 4320]
The right rail member 4320 guides the lower movable staging object 4200 up and down. The right rail member 4320 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The right rail member 4320 is fixed to the right portion of the frame body 4100 so as to extend vertically.

[Left drive mechanism 4330]
The left side drive mechanism 4330 drives the lower movable staging object 4200 up and down. The left drive mechanism 4330 mainly includes an upper pulley 4331, a lower pulley 4332, a belt 4333, a transmission gear 4334, and a motor 4335.

The upper pulley 4331 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley 4331 is provided in the upper and lower half of the left side surface of the frame body 4100. More specifically, the upper pulley 4331 is arranged inside the left side surface of the frame body 4100. The upper pulley 4331 is rotatably supported by a movable support 4331a provided on the outside of the left side surface of the frame body 4100 and slidable up and down. The movable support 4331a is always urged upward by the spring 4331b.

The lower pulley 4332 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley 4332 is provided at the lower part of the left side surface of the frame body 4100 (below the upper pulley 4331). More specifically, the lower pulley 4332 is rotatably supported inside the left side surface of the frame body 4100.

The belt 4333 supports the lower movable staging object 4200. The belt 4333 is wound around the upper pulley 4331 and the lower pulley 4332.

The transmission gear 4334 transmits a driving force to the lower pulley 4332. The transmission gear 4334 is arranged so as to mesh with a gear formed on the lower pulley 4332.

The motor 4335 is a drive source for raising and lowering the lower movable staging object 4200 up and down. The motor 4335 is provided at the lower left of the frame body 4100. The driving force from the output shaft (not shown) of the motor 4335 is transmitted to the transmission gear 4334. When the transmission gear 4334 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4335, the lower pulley 4332 rotates with the rotation of the transmission gear 4334. As a result, the belt 4333 rotates between the upper pulley 4331 and the lower pulley 4332.

[Right drive mechanism 4340]
The right side drive mechanism 4340 drives the lower movable staging object 4200 up and down. The right drive mechanism 4340 mainly includes an upper pulley 4341, a lower pulley (not shown), a belt 4343, a transmission gear (not shown), and a motor 4345. Since the right side drive mechanism 4340 is configured in substantially the same manner as the left side drive mechanism 4330 (substantially symmetrical), the configuration will be briefly described below.

The upper pulley 4341 and the lower pulley (not shown) are provided on the right side surface of the frame body 4100. A belt 4343 is wound around the upper pulley 4341 and the lower pulley (not shown). The driving force of the motor 4345 is transmitted to the lower pulley via a transmission gear (not shown). The driving force of the motor 4345 causes the belt 4343 to rotate.

<About the lower movable staging accessory 4200 and the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300>
The lower movable staging accessory 4200 is supported so as to be able to move up and down by the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 configured as described above. Specifically, the sliding portion 4221b of the left side case 4221 and the rail 4311 of the left side rail member 4310 are slidably in contact with each other. Further, the right rail member 4320 is slidably inserted into the sliding portion 4225a of the right case 4225.

Further, the belt 4333 is sandwiched between the holding portion 4221c of the lower movable staging object 4200 and the left side case 4221, so that the left side case 4221 is connected to the belt 4333. Further, the belt 4343 is sandwiched between the holding portion 4225b of the lower movable staging object 4200 and the right side case 4225, so that the right side case 4225 is connected to the belt 4343 (see FIG. 44). In this way, the lower movable staging object 4200 is supported by the left and right belts 4333 and the belts 4343. By rotating the left and right belts 4333 and the belts 4343 in any direction, the lower movable staging accessory 4200 can be moved up and down. The vertical position of the lower movable staging accessory 4200 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the lower movable staging accessory 4200 can be rotated to an arbitrary vertical position based on the detection value of the sensor. ..

[Upper movable production character 4400]
The upper movable effecting accessory 4400 shown in FIGS. 42 to 44 and 60 to 62 is to perform an effect on the upper part of the first accessory device 4000 by using the upper rotating decorative body 4410 described later. The upper movable staging object 4400 mainly includes an upper rotation decoration body 4410 and an upper rotation drive mechanism 4420. Since the configuration of the upper movable staging accessory 4400 is substantially the same as the configuration of the lower movable staging accessory 4200 described above, the differences from the lower movable staging accessory 4200 will be described in detail below.

[Upper rotating decorative body 4410]
The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The upper rotating decoration body 4410 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. Specifically, the upper rotating decoration body 4410 mainly includes a first surface 4411, a second surface 4412, a third surface 4413, a fourth surface 4414, a left side surface 4415, and a right side surface 4416.

The first surface 4411 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In the initial state described later, the first surface 4411 is directed forward. The first surface 4411 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The first surface 4411 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The first surface 4411 is appropriately decorated (characters, figures, characters, etc.).

The second surface 4412 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed (opposite) on the opposite side to the first surface 4411. In the initial state described later, the second surface 4412 is directed backward. The second surface 4412 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The second surface 4412 is formed so as to have substantially the same area as the first surface 4411. The second surface 4412 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The second surface 4412 is provided with an appropriate decoration (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decoration formed on the first surface 4411. Specifically, the second surface 4412 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 (for example, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210). English words that make up one meaning together with the decorations (for example, "BIG" on the second side 4412 and "BONUS" on the second side 4212, and the two together are called "BIG BONUS". Meaningful English words) etc.) are given. A protrusion 4412a is formed on the second surface 4412.

The protrusion 4412a is a portion formed so as to protrude from the surface of the second surface 4412. The protrusions 4412a are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412, respectively. Strictly speaking, the protruding portion 4412a is formed by projecting the upper and lower ends of the rear side portions of the left side surface 4415 and the right side surface 4416, which will be described later, to the rear. The protruding portion 4412a is formed so that the rear end portion has a planar shape substantially parallel to the second surface 4412. The projecting portion 4412a projects rearward from the second surface 4412 to such an extent that the planar rear end portion is located rearward from the decoration formed on the second surface 4412.

The third surface 4413 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface adjacent to the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. In the initial state described later, the third surface 4413 is directed downward. The third surface 4413 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The third surface 4413 is formed so as to have a smaller area than the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. Specifically, the front-rear width of the third surface 4413 is formed to be smaller than the vertical width of the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. The third surface 4413 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The third surface 4413 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. Specifically, the third surface 4413 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 (for example, the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210). A pattern that forms an integral shape together with the decorated decoration) is applied.

The fourth surface 4414 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed (opposite) on the opposite side to the third surface 4413. In the initial state described later, the fourth surface 4414 is directed upward. The fourth surface 4414 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The fourth surface 4414 is formed so as to have substantially the same area as the third surface 4413 (an area smaller than the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412). The fourth surface 4414 is formed of a material having at least a part of light transmission. The fourth surface 4414 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. A decorative through hole 4414a and an engaging convex portion 4414b are formed on the fourth surface 4414.

The decorative through hole 4414a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the fourth surface 4414. The decorative through hole 4414a is formed so as to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the fourth surface 4414. As a result, the decorative through hole 4414a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the fourth surface 4414. The internal space and the external space of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are communicated with each other through the decorative through hole 4414a. The heat of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be released (heated) to the outside through the decorative through hole 4414a.

The engaging convex portion 4414b is a convex portion formed so as to project the surface of the fourth surface 4414. The engaging convex portions 4414b are formed at the front and rear center portions of the left and right ends of the fourth surface 4414, respectively. The engaging convex portion 4414b is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the side. The engaging convex portion 4414b mainly includes an inclined surface 4414d.

The inclined surface 4414d is a pair of front and rear surfaces of the engaging convex portion 4414b. The pair of inclined surfaces 4414d are inclined so as to be close to each other (the front-rear width gradually narrows) from the bottom side to the tip side of the engaging convex portion 4414b.

The left side surface 4415 is one surface (left side surface) of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left side surface 4415 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The rear end of the left side surface 4415 forms the protrusion 4412a of the second surface 4412 described above.

The right side surface 4416 is one surface (right side surface) of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The right side surface 4416 is mainly formed of one plate-shaped member. The rear end of the right side surface 4416 forms the protrusion 4412a of the second surface 4412 described above.

[Upper rotation drive mechanism 4420]
The upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 rotates and drives the upper rotation decoration body 4410. The upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 mainly includes a left side case 4421, a right side case 4425, and the like.

The configuration of the upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 is substantially the same as the configuration of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220 (the one that rotationally drives the lower rotation decoration body 4210) described above. That is, the upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 is provided with a substantially columnar rotation shaft portion (corresponding to the rotation shaft portion 4226 of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) between the left side case 4421 and the right side case 4425. .. Further, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion. The upper rotation decoration body 4410 is rotated by the driving force of a motor (corresponding to the motor 4222 of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) provided in the left side case 4421 (corresponding to the motor 4222 of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220).

In this way, by appropriately driving a motor (not shown), the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be rotated and a desired surface can be turned forward. Since light is emitted forward from a light emitting substrate (not shown) inside the upper rotating decoration body 4410, the front surface of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 can be made to emit bright light. The rotation position of the upper rotation decoration body 4410 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the upper rotation decoration body 4410 is rotated to an arbitrary rotation position based on the detection value of the sensor. Can be done.

[Upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500]
The upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 and 47 is for elevating and driving the upper movable staging accessory 4400. The upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500 mainly includes a left rail member 4310, a right rail member 4320, a left drive mechanism 4530, and a right drive mechanism 4540.

The configuration of the upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500 is substantially the same as the configuration of the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 (which drives the lower movable staging accessory 4200 up and down) (substantially vertically symmetrical). That is, the left side case 4421 and the right side case 4425 of the upper movable staging object 4400 are slidably provided on the upper part of the left side rail member 4310 and the right side rail member 4320, respectively. Further, the left side case 4421 and the right side case 4425 of the upper movable staging agent 4400 are connected to the belt 4533 of the left side drive mechanism 4530 and the belt 4543 of the right side drive mechanism 4540, respectively. By driving the motor 4535 and the motor 4545 to rotate the left and right belts 4533 and the belt 4543 in an arbitrary direction, the upper movable staging accessory 4400 can be moved up and down. The vertical position of the upper movable staging accessory 4400 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the upper movable staging accessory 4400 can be rotated to an arbitrary vertical position based on the detection value of the sensor. ..

[Deuteragonist device 5000]
Next, the second accessory device 5000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 42, and 63 to 66. The second accessory device 5000 performs the effect by moving the effect member (the left movable decorative body 5120 or the like described later). The second accessory device 5000 mainly includes a left movable effect accessory 5100 and a right movable effect accessory 5200.

[Left movable production character 5100]
The left movable effecting object 5100 shown in FIGS. 1, 42, 63, and 64 is an effect using the left movable decorative body 5120, which will be described later. The left movable staging accessory 5100 is arranged in front of the left portion (left side surface of the frame body 4100) of the first accessory device 4000. The left movable staging accessory 5100 mainly includes a left decorative frame body 5110, a left movable decorative body 5120, and a left accessory sliding mechanism 5130.

[Left decorative frame 5110]
The left decorative frame body 5110 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The front surface of the left decorative frame 5110 is appropriately decorated.

[Left movable decorative body 5120]
The left movable decorative body 5120 is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. The left movable decorative body 5120 mainly includes a base member 5121 and a decorative member 5122.

The base member 5121 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down.

The decorative member 5122 is a member with appropriate decoration. The decorative member 5122 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. An appropriate decoration is formed on the front surface of the decorative member 5122. The decorative member 5122 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 5121.

[Left accessory sliding mechanism 5130]
The left accessory sliding mechanism 5130 slides the left movable decorative body 5120 to the left and right with respect to the left decorative frame body 5110. The left accessory sliding mechanism 5130 mainly includes a motor 5131, an output gear 5132, a pinion gear 5133, a rack gear 5134, a guide shaft portion 5135, and a guide member 5136.

The motor 5131 is a drive source for sliding the left movable decorative body 5120. The motor 5131 is provided on the upper part of the rear surface of the left decorative frame body 5110.

The output gear 5132 is for outputting the driving force of the motor 5131. The output gear 5132 is connected to an output shaft (not shown) of the motor 5131 with the rotation axis direction directed in the front-rear direction.

The pinion gear 5133 transmits the driving force from the output gear 5132. The pinion gear 5133 is arranged below the output gear 5132 with the rotation axis direction facing the front-rear direction. The pinion gear 5133 is rotatably supported by the left decorative frame body 5110. The pinion gear 5133 is arranged so as to mesh with the output gear 5132.

The rack gear 5134 converts the driving force transmitted from the pinion gear 5133 into a linear motion. The rack gear 5134 is integrally formed with the base member 5121 at the upper end of the base member 5121 of the left movable decorative body 5120. The rack gear 5134 is formed so as to extend to the left and right.

The guide shaft portion 5135 is a portion for connecting the left movable decorative body 5120 to the left decorative frame body 5110 so as to be movable (sliding). The guide shaft portion 5135 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction facing forward and backward. The guide shaft portion 5135 is formed so as to extend forward from the upper part of the front surface of the base member 5121 of the left movable decorative body 5120. Two guide shaft portions 5135 are provided side by side on the front surface of the base member 5121.

The guide member 5136 is a portion for connecting the left movable decorative body 5120 to the left decorative frame body 5110 so as to be movable (sliding). The guide member 5136 is a substantially plate-shaped member whose longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. The guide member 5136 is fixed to the left decorative frame body 5110 below the pinion gear 5133. The guide member 5136 is formed with elongated holes 5136a extending to the left and right.

The guide shaft portion 5135 configured in this way is inserted into the elongated hole 5136a of the guide member 5136 via the collar 5135a. As a result, the left movable decorative body 5120 becomes slidable with respect to the left decorative frame body 5110 along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 5136a (that is, in the left-right direction). At this time, the rack gear 5134 is arranged so as to mesh with the pinion gear 5133.

The left movable decorative body 5120 is slid to the left and right by the left accessory sliding mechanism 5130 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 5131 is driven, the driving force of the motor 5131 is transmitted to the rack gear 5134 via the output gear 5132 and the like, and the rack gear 5134 slides left and right. By controlling the operation of the motor 5131 and rotating the output gear 5132 in any direction, the rack gear 5134 can be slid in any direction (either left or right), and the left movable decorative body 5120 is left and right. Can be slid to.

[Right part movable production character 5200]
The right part movable effecting object 5200 shown in FIGS. 1, 42, 65 and 66 is to perform an effect using the right part movable decorative body 5220, which will be described later. The right portion movable staging accessory 5200 is arranged in front of the right portion (right side surface of the frame body 4100) of the first accessory device 4000. The right portion movable staging object 5200 mainly includes a right portion decorative frame body 5210, a right portion movable decorative body 5220, and a right portion accessory sliding mechanism 5230. Since the right-hand movable staging accessory 5200 is configured in substantially the same manner as the left-part movable staging accessory 5100 (substantially symmetrical), the configuration will be briefly described below.

[Right decorative frame 5210]
The right decorative frame body 5210 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The front surface of the right decorative frame 5210 is appropriately decorated.

[Right movable decorative body 5220]
The right movable decorative body 5220 is appropriately decorated and is moved to produce an effect. The right movable decorative body 5220 mainly includes a base member 5221 and a decorative member 5222. The decorative member 5222 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 5221.

[Right part accessory sliding mechanism 5230]
The right part accessory sliding mechanism 5230 slides the right part movable decorative body 5220 to the left and right with respect to the right part decorative frame body 5210. The right accessory sliding mechanism 5230 mainly includes a motor 5231, an output gear (not shown), a pinion gear 5233, a rack gear 5234, a guide shaft portion 5235, and a guide member 5236.

A motor 5231, an output gear (not shown), a pinion gear 5233, and a guide member 5236 are provided on the upper portion of the rear surface of the right decorative frame body 5210. Further, the base member 5221 is provided with a rack gear 5234 and a guide shaft portion 5235.

The guide shaft portion 5235 is inserted into the elongated hole 5236a of the guide member 5236 via the collar 5235a. As a result, the right movable decorative body 5220 becomes slidable with respect to the right decorative frame 5210 along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 5236a (that is, in the left-right direction). At this time, the rack gear 5234 is arranged so as to mesh with the pinion gear 5233.

The right movable decorative body 5220 is slid to the left and right by the right accessory sliding mechanism 5230 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 5231 is driven, the driving force of the motor 5231 is transmitted to the rack gear 5234 via an output gear or the like, and the rack gear 5234 slides left and right. By controlling the operation of the motor 5231 and rotating the output gear in any direction, the rack gear 5234 can be slid in any direction (either left or right), and the right movable decorative body 5220 is moved left and right. Can be slid.

<About the operation of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000>
Hereinafter, an example of an effect mode (operation mode) by the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 67 to 74. In addition, in FIG. 1 and FIGS. 67 to 74, the members necessary for explaining the operation of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are shown in a simplified manner as appropriate. Further, in order to make it easy to distinguish each surface of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 of the first accessory device 4000, different alphabets are described on each surface. Specifically, "A", "B" and "C" are shown on the first surface 4211, the second surface 4212 and the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210, respectively. Further, "a", "b" and "c" are shown on the first surface 4411, the second surface 4412 and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410, respectively.

The first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 configured as described above are included in the above-mentioned movable effect device 270 (see FIG. 22), and are included in the effect device control circuit 338 of the sub control board 33. It is connected. The operations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 as described below are controlled by the sub control board 33 (staging device control circuit 338).

The first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly switched to an initial state, a first state, a second state, or a third state by the sub control board 33. The order of switching the respective states is not limited, and it is possible to switch from any one state to any other state. Hereinafter, each state will be described.

First, the initial state will be described. FIG. 1 shows the initial state of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000. In the initial state, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid to the lowest position (the lowest position in the range that can be moved up and down by the lower accessory raising / lowering mechanism 4300) with the first surface 4211 facing forward. ing. In this state, almost the entire lower rotating decorative body 4210 is located below the lower end of the opening 1h (behind the stage 1001). The player can visually recognize the decoration applied to the first surface 4211 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 via the transparent game board main body (panel main body) in which the opening 1h is formed.

Further, in the initial state, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 slides to the uppermost position (the uppermost position in the range that can be moved up and down by the upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) with the first surface 4411 facing forward. Has been done. In this state, almost the entire upper rotating decorative body 4410 is located at the upper end of the opening 1h (behind the decorative member 1g), and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is difficult to see from the front. ..

Further, in the initial state, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are each slid to the outermost side (left and right outer side). In this state, the outer portions of the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are located outside the opening 1h, and the inner portions of the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are located. It is in a state where it can be visually recognized from the front.

Next, the first state (see FIG. 67) will be described. The upper rotating decoration body 4410 is slid down from the initial state to a position lowered by a predetermined distance (to the extent that substantially the entire upper rotating decoration body 4410 is located inside the opening 1h) and stopped. Then, it is switched to the first state.

In the first state, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is located immediately below the decorative member 1 g with the first surface 4411 facing forward. In this state, the player can visually recognize the decoration applied to the first surface 4411 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 through the opening 1h.

Further, in the first state, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid most downward with the first surface 4211 facing forward as in the initial state.

In such a first state, the upper rotating decoration body 4410 and the lower rotating decoration body 4210 are separated from each other. In the first state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 can draw the player's attention mainly to the decoration applied to the first surface 4411 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410.

Next, the second state (see FIG. 70) will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is slid and stopped in the upper and lower halfway portion (the upper and lower halfway portion in the range in which the upper and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4500 can move up and down). The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated with the sliding up and down stopped, and the second surface 4412 is turned forward. After that, as shown in FIG. 69, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is further slid downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid and stopped in the upper and lower middle portion (the upper and lower intermediate portion in the range in which the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 can move up and down). The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is rotated with the sliding up and down stopped, and the second surface 4212 is turned forward. After that, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is further slid upward.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are slid until they are close to each other in the vicinity of the substantially center of the opening 1h. At this time, the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 face each other vertically.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, after the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are in close proximity to each other, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are each innermost (left and right inner). ) Is slid. As a result, the members provided on the left and right of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 (members for driving the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the like, for example, the left side case 4221 and the right side case 4225) are removed. Can be concealed by the left movable ornament 5120 and the right movable ornament 5220.

In such a second state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410. The decorations made can draw the player's attention. As described above, the decorations applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are related (for example, the second surface 4212 and the second surface). The English words given to 4412 are combined to form one meaning).

When the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are in close proximity to each other when the second state is switched to, the engagement formed on the fourth surface 4414. The convex portion 4414b is fitted into the engaging concave portion 4214b formed on the fourth surface 4214 (see FIG. 71). When the engaging convex portion 4414b is fitted into the engaging concave portion 4214b, the relative position (particularly, the relative position in the front-rear direction) between the engaging convex portion 4414b and the engaging concave portion 4214b is adjusted by the inclined surface 4414d and the inclined surface 4214d. Will be done. As a result, the tip of the engaging convex portion 4414b is fitted so as to be located substantially in the center of the front and rear of the engaging concave portion 4214b. By fitting the engaging convex portion 4414b into the engaging concave portion 4214b in this way, the relative positions of the engaging convex portion 4414b and the engaging concave portion 4214b, and by extension, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410. The relative position can be adjusted. In the present embodiment, the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper portion so that the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are flush with each other (parallel). The relative position of the rotating ornament 4410 is adjusted. The dimension in the width direction of the base end portion of the engaging convex portion 4414b is formed so as to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the opening portion of the engaging concave portion 4214b. Even if it exists at the position, it is sized to be inserted into the engaging recess 4214b.

By adjusting the relative positions of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 in this way, the aesthetic appearance of the decorations formed on the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 can be improved. Can be done. For example, as described above, the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 is related (for example, the second surface 4212 and the first surface). When the English words applied to the two sides 4412 are combined to form one meaning, etc.), the relationship between the two decorations can be further enhanced.

Next, the third state (see FIG. 74) will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is slid in the middle of the upper and lower parts and stopped. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated with the sliding up and down stopped, and the third surface 4413 is turned forward. After that, as shown in FIG. 73, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is further slid downward (lowermost).

Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid in the middle of the upper and lower parts and stopped. The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is rotated with the sliding up and down stopped, and the third surface 4213 is turned forward. After that, as shown in FIG. 73, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is further slid upward (uppermost).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 73, the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are brought close to each other in the vicinity of substantially the center of the opening 1h. At this time, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 face each other vertically.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, after the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are in close proximity to each other, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are each innermost (left and right inner). ) Is slid. As a result, the members provided on the left and right of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 (members for driving the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the like, for example, the left side case 4221 and the right side case 4225) are removed. Can be concealed by the left movable ornament 5120 and the right movable ornament 5220.

In such a third state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410. The decorations made can draw the player's attention. As described above, the decorations applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are related (for example, the third surface 4213 and the third surface). The decorations on the 4413 combine to form an integral shape). Further, the area of the surface (third surface 4213 and the third surface 4413) directed forward in the third state is the area of the surface (second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412) directed forward in the second state. Is smaller than.

When the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are close to each other when switching to the third state, they are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212. The protrusions 4212a and the protrusions 4412a formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412 come into contact with each other. In this way, since the protrusion 4212a and the protrusion 4412a are in contact with each other, the second surface 4212 (more specifically, the decoration or the like applied to the second surface 4212) and the second surface 4412 (more specifically, the decoration or the like) are brought into contact with each other. , The decoration etc. applied to the second surface 4412) does not come into contact with it. In this way, the protrusions 4212a and the protrusions 4412a can prevent the decorations from coming into contact with each other, and prevent the decorations from being damaged.

The switching between the initial state, the first state, the second state, and the third state described above is controlled by the sub control board 33 (staging device control circuit 338) as described above, and is any one state. It is possible to switch from to any other state. The effect pattern by switching the states in this way is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery and the predetermined effect lottery table.

Further, when switching between the states as described above, the vertical positions of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are detected by an appropriate sensor as described above, and based on the detection value of the sensor. The vertical position of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 or the like is adjusted. For example, the vertical position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like in each state is detected by the sensor, or the vertical position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like in at least one state of each state is detected by the sensor and the position is concerned. It is possible to switch to another state (adjust the amount of vertical movement) based on.

Further, in the above description, the effect of moving the lower rotating decorative body 4210, the upper rotating decorative body 4410, the left movable decorative body 5120, and the right movable decorative body 5220 is mainly described, but the lower rotating decorative body is described. In addition to the movement of the body 4210 and the like (switching between the above states), the display of the display device (liquid crystal display device 4) provided behind the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like is appropriately controlled by the display device. It is also possible to produce a combination of images. In particular, in the embodiment (third state) shown in FIG. 74, the protruding portion 4212a formed on the second surface 4212 and the protruding portion 4412a formed on the second surface 4412 come into contact with each other, and thus the state shown in FIG. 70. Compared to the (second state), between the upper and lower decorative bodies (lower rotating decorative body 4210 and upper rotating decorative body 4410) (particularly, a portion other than the contact portion between the protruding portion 4212a and the protruding portion 4412a). A gap (gap) is created. Therefore, it is desirable that the display device (liquid crystal display device 4) behind the gap performs an effect (image effect) of displaying an image that complements the gap. As the image, it is desirable to use an image having a sense of relevance and unity with the decoration applied to the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410. Further, as shown in FIGS. 70 (second state) and 74 (third state), the upper and lower decorative bodies (lower rotating decorative body 4210 and upper rotating decorative body 4410) are close to each other to complete one decoration. In this state, it is desirable to perform an image effect corresponding to the completed decoration on a display device (liquid crystal display device 4) that can be visually recognized from above and below the decoration.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, a pachinko gaming machine has been exemplified as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a pachislot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mechanism for rotating the lower rotation decoration body 4210 (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a mechanism for raising and lowering the lower part (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) are independently provided. As a result, the rotation and ascending / descending of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be controlled independently. As a result, for example, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be rotated while being moved up and down, or can be rotated while the raising and lowering is stopped, enabling fine control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to control by using one mechanism such that the rotation and the ascending / descending of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are interlocked with each other. For example, it is also possible to rotate and move the lower rotating decorative body 4210 up and down by using the power from one drive source (motor or the like). The same can be said not only for the lower rotating decorative body 4210 but also for the upper rotating decorative body 4410.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is moved up and down by the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300, but the present invention does not limit the moving direction of the lower rotating decorative body 4210. do not have. For example, it is also possible to make the lower rotating decorative body 4210 movable to the left and right. In this case, the upper rotating decoration body 4410 can be similarly moved to the left and right, and the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 can be configured to be close to or separated from each other to the left and right. .. Further, the lower rotating decoration body 4210 or the like is moved up and down or left and right, and then moved left and right or up and down, and the lower rotating decoration body 4210 etc. is moved stepwise (two or more steps) in a plurality of directions. It may be something to make. Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like may be moved in an oblique direction by combining the vertical movement and the horizontal movement.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are configured to have a larger area than the third surface 4213 and the fourth surface 4214. As a result, it is possible to change the effect of rotating the lower rotating decorative body 4210. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of each surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is not limited. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212 and the third surface 4213 and the fourth surface 4214 may be reversed, or all the surfaces may be configured to have the same area. be. Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 may be formed in a cubic shape having the same size (same shape) on all surfaces including the left side surface 4215 and the right side surface 4216. Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 may have various polyhedra such as a triangular parallelepiped or a pentagonal columnar shape instead of a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and may have a more complicated shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are close to each other in the third state, they are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212. The protruding portions 4212a and the protruding portions 4412a formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412 are assumed to be in contact with each other. Thereby, the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412 can be protected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to form a similar protrusion on other surfaces to protect the decoration. For example, since the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are close to each other even in the second state, protrusions are formed on the fourth surface 4214 and the fourth surface 4414 facing each other in the second state. It may be configured to be in contact with each other to protect the decoration.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second state, when the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are close to each other, they are formed on the fourth surface 4414. It is assumed that the engaging convex portion 4414b is fitted into the engaging concave portion 4214b formed on the fourth surface 4214. Thereby, the relative positions of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 can be adjusted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar engaging protrusions and recesses are formed on other surfaces to adjust the relative positions of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410. It is also possible to configure it as such. For example, since the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are close to each other even in the third state, the second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412 facing each other in the third state have an engaging convex portion. Engagement recesses may be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the third state, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to display an image that complements the gap formed between the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in other states (for example, the second state), the liquid crystal display device 4 is used to form between the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410. It may be configured to display an image that complements the gap to be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the engaging concave portion 4214b is formed in the lower rotating decorative body 4210, and the engaging convex portion 4414b is formed in the upper rotating decorative body 4410, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, it is also possible to form an engaging convex portion 4414b on the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and an engaging concave portion 4214b on the upper rotating decorative body 4410.

Further, in the present embodiment, the relative positions of the engaging concave portions 4214b are adjusted by the inclined surface 4214d and the inclined surface 4414d of the engaging convex portion 4414b, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, even if the inclined surface is formed only in either the engaging recess 4214b or the engaging convex portion 4414b, the relative position between the engaging concave portion 4214b and the engaging convex portion 4414b can be adjusted.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

<Appendix 1>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to move a plurality of effect members to perform the effect.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when the effect is performed by moving a plurality of effect members in this way, it is difficult to devise a movement of the effect member that enhances the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A rectangular parallelepiped first staging member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), the first staging member capable of rotating the first staging member so that any one of the faces of the first staging member faces forward. It includes one rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first staging member up and down and / or left and right. The first movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) and
A rectangular parallelepiped second staging member (upper rotating decorative body 4410), a second staging member capable of rotating the second staging member so that any one of the faces of the second staging member faces forward. (2) A rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up / down and / or left / right direction are provided. The second movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) and
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device can be changed to at least the first state and the second state. Or a control unit (sub control board 33) that can switch to the third state,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first state is
The first maximum surface (first surface 4211) having the largest area among the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second largest surface (first surface) having the largest area among the surfaces of the second effect member. It is a state in which the surface 4411) is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned apart from each other.
The second state is
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first maximum surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second maximum surface of the surface of the second effect member is It is a state in which the second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.
The third state is
The first facet (third surface 4213) having an area smaller than the first maximum surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the surface of the second effect member is from the second maximum surface. The second small surface (third surface 4413) having a small area is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Appendix 1-2>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to move a plurality of effect members to perform the effect.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when the effect is performed by moving a plurality of effect members in this way, it is difficult to devise a movement of the effect member that enhances the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward. It includes one rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first staging member up and down and / or left and right. The first movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) and
A polyhedral second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410), a second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the second effect member faces forward. (2) A rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up / down and / or left / right direction are provided. The second movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) and
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device can be changed to at least the first state and the second state. Or a control unit that can switch to the third state,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first state is
The first reference surface (first surface 4211), which is one of the surfaces of the first effect member, is directed forward, and the second reference surface (first surface), which is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. It is a state in which the surface 4411) is directed forward and the first staging member and the second staging member are positioned apart from each other.
The second state is
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second reference surface of the surface of the second effect member is It is a state in which the second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.
The third state is
Of the surfaces of the first effect member, the first reference surface and the first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first facing surface are directed forward, and the second surface of the second effect member. This is a state in which the reference surface and the second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the second facing surface are directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other. It is a thing.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Appendix 1-3>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to move a plurality of effect members to perform the effect.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when the effect is performed by moving a plurality of effect members in this way, it is difficult to devise a movement of the effect member that enhances the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and the first staging member can be moved up and down and / or left and right, and can be controlled independently of the first rotation drive unit. A first movable accessory device (lower movable staging accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) provided with a first moving drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300), and
A polyhedral second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410), a second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the second effect member faces forward. The second rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and the second staging member can be moved up and down and / or left and right, and can be controlled independently of the second rotation drive unit. A second movable accessory device (upper movable staging accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) provided with a second moving drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500), and
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device can be changed to at least the first state and the second state. Or a control unit (sub control board 33) that can switch to the third state,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first state is
The first reference surface (first surface 4211), which is one of the surfaces of the first effect member, is directed forward, and the second reference surface (first surface), which is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. It is a state in which the surface 4411) is directed forward and the first staging member and the second staging member are positioned apart from each other.
The second state is
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second reference surface of the surface of the second effect member is It is a state in which the second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.
The third state is
Of the surfaces of the first effect member, the first reference surface and the first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first facing surface are directed forward, and the second surface of the second effect member. This is a state in which the reference surface and the second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the second facing surface are directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other. It is a thing.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the rotation of the first effect member and the second effect member and the movement in the vertical and / or left-right directions can be independently performed, and fine control of the first effect member and the second effect member can be performed. Is possible.

<Appendix 1-4>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine, in general, in order to make the effect member emit light, a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) may be provided inside the effect member. However, for example, when the staging member is rotatable, a large space is required for arranging the mechanism in order to make the mechanism for rotation and the mechanism for light emission (installation of the light emitting portion) compatible with each other. There was room for improvement in that respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of compactly configuring a mechanism for rotating and emitting light of an effect member.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that emits light by irradiating the inner surface of the effect member with light, and a support that supports the effect member. (Left side case 4221 and right side case 4225), and a rotation drive unit capable of rotating the effect member with respect to the support so that one of the surfaces of the effect member faces forward. A movable accessory device (lower movable staging accessory 4200) provided with (motor 4222, output gear 4223, driven gear 4224, etc.) and
A control unit (sub control board 33) that controls the operation of the movable accessory device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The rotation drive unit is
A rotating body (driven gear 4224) that is rotatably supported by the support, is rotatable by power from a drive source, and can rotate integrally with the effect member by engaging with the effect member. Equipped with
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) arranged so as to penetrate the rotation center of the rotating body, fixed to the support body, and extended to the inside of the staging member.
A light emitting portion (light emitting substrate 4226e) that is supported by the support portion and is capable of emitting light inside the staging member, and
Is provided.

In addition, the rotating body is
The main body (main body 4224a) formed in the shape of a spur gear and
A protrusion (projection 4224c) formed so as to project from one side surface of the main body and engageable with the staging member,
Is provided.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, a mechanism for rotating and emitting light of the staging member can be compactly configured.

<Appendix 1-5>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-5 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. ..

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when forming one decoration with a plurality of staging members, there is room for improvement in that if the relative positions of the staging members deviate from each other, the aesthetic appearance of the decoration may be impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the aesthetic appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of staging members.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward. It includes one rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first staging member up and down and / or left and right. The first movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) and
A polyhedral second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410), a second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the second effect member faces forward. (2) A rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up / down and / or left / right direction are provided. The second movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) and
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the state of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device can be changed to the first state, the second state, or the second state. The control unit (sub control board 33) that switches to the third state,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first state is
The first reference surface (first surface 4211), which is one of the surfaces of the first effect member, is directed forward, and the second reference surface (first surface), which is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. It is a state in which the surface 4411) is directed forward and the first staging member and the second staging member are positioned apart from each other.
The second state is
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second reference surface of the surface of the second effect member is It is a state in which the second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.
The third state is
Of the surfaces of the first effect member, the first reference surface and the first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first facing surface are directed forward, and the second surface of the second effect member. It is a state in which the reference surface and the second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the second facing surface are directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other. ,
Either one of the first staging member or the second staging member is
It is provided with a recess (engagement recess 4214b) having a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) that spreads toward the opening side.
Either or the other of the first staging member or the second staging member
It has a second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) corresponding to the first inclined surface of the concave portion and narrows toward the tip side, and is fitted into the concave portion in the second state and / or the third state. It is provided with a convex portion (engaged convex portion 4414b) to be formed.

Further, in the recess,
A through hole (through hole 4214e) that communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the recess is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first staging member and the second staging member, and to improve the aesthetic appearance of the decoration formed by the plurality of staging members (first staging member and second staging member).

Further, the heat inside the first staging member or the second staging member in which the recess is formed can be dissipated from the through hole. Further, by forming the through hole in the recess, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent the first effect member or the second effect member from spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

<Appendix 1-6>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-6 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to bring a plurality of effect members close to each other so as to be in contact with each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. be.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, there is room for improvement in that when a plurality of staging members are brought into contact with each other, the decorations formed on the surfaces facing each other may be damaged.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing damage to decorations formed on facing surfaces when a plurality of staging members are brought close to each other. And.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward. It includes one rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first staging member up and down and / or left and right. The first movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) and
A polyhedral second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410), a second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that any one of the surfaces of the second effect member faces forward. (2) A rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up / down and / or left / right direction are provided. The second movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) and
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the state of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device can be changed to the first state, the second state, or the second state. The control unit (sub control board 33) that switches to the third state,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first state is
The first reference surface (first surface 4211), which is one of the surfaces of the first effect member, is directed forward, and the second reference surface (first surface), which is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. It is a state in which the surface 4411) is directed forward and the first staging member and the second staging member are positioned apart from each other.
The second state is
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface of the surface of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second reference surface of the surface of the second effect member is It is a state in which the second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other.
The third state is
Of the surfaces of the first effect member, the first reference surface and the first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first facing surface are directed forward, and the second surface of the second effect member. It is a state in which the reference surface and the second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the second facing surface are directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in close proximity to each other. ,
The first staging member and the second staging member
With the decoration formed on the facing surfaces facing each other in the second state and / or the third state,
Protruding portions (projecting portions 4212a and projecting portions 4412a) formed so as to project more than the decorations formed on the facing surfaces.
Equipped with
In the second state and / or in the third state
The protrusions formed on the first effect member and the second effect member come into contact with each other.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A display device (liquid crystal display device 4) arranged behind the first effect member and the second effect member is further provided.
The display device is
In the second state and / or the third state, the display device is provided with a gap formed between the first effect member and the second effect member at a position other than the contact point between the protrusions. It displays a complementary image.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the decoration formed on the facing surface when the plurality of staging members are brought close to each other.

Further, by complementing the gap formed between the first effect member and the second effect member, the aesthetic appearance of the decoration can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Appendix 1-7>
The gaming machines in Appendix 1-7 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine, in general, in order to make the effect member emit light, a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) may be provided inside the effect member. However, for example, when the staging member is rotatable, a large space is required for arranging the mechanism in order to make the mechanism for rotation and the mechanism for light emission (installation of the light emitting portion) compatible with each other. There was room for improvement in that respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of compactly configuring a mechanism for rotating and emitting light of an effect member.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A polyhedral effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that emits light by irradiating the inner surface of the effect member with light, and a support that supports the effect member. (Left side case 4221 and right side case 4225), and a rotation drive unit capable of rotating the effect member with respect to the support so that one of the surfaces of the effect member faces forward. A movable accessory device (lower movable staging accessory 4200) provided with (motor 4222, output gear 4223, driven gear 4224, etc.) and
A control unit (sub control board 33) that controls the operation of the movable accessory device, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) fixed to the support and extended to the inside of the staging member, and
A light emitting unit (light emitting substrate 4226e) that is arranged inside the staging member and is capable of emitting light,
A fixed portion (front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d) for fixing the light emitting portion to the support portion, and
Equipped with
The fixed part is
It has a curved surface that forms a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the staging member, and holds the light emitting portion by sandwiching the light emitting portion from the front and back.

In addition, the rotation drive unit is
A rotating body (driven gear 4224) that is rotatably supported by the support, is rotatable by power from a drive source, and can rotate integrally with the effect member by engaging with the effect member. Equipped with
The support portion is
It is arranged so as to penetrate the rotation center of the rotating body.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, a mechanism for rotating and emitting light of the staging member can be compactly configured.

<Appendix 2>
The gaming machines in Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. ..

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when forming one decoration with a plurality of staging members, there is room for improvement in that if the relative positions of the staging members deviate from each other, the aesthetic appearance of the decoration may be impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the aesthetic appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of staging members.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right. (1) Movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300),
A second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410) and a second moving drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. (Ii) Movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500),
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that causes the first effect member and the second effect member to be close to or separated from each other by controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Either one of the first staging member or the second staging member is
It is provided with a recess (engagement recess 4214b) having a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) that spreads toward the opening side.
Either or the other of the first staging member or the second staging member
When it has a second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) corresponding to the first inclined surface of the concave portion and narrows toward the tip side, and the first effect member and the second effect member are in close proximity to each other. It is provided with a convex portion (engaged convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion.

Further, in the recess,
A through hole that communicates the inside and the outside of the first staging member or the second staging member in which the recess is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first staging member and the second staging member, and to improve the aesthetic appearance of the decoration formed by the plurality of staging members (first staging member and second staging member).

Further, the heat inside the first staging member or the second staging member in which the recess is formed can be dissipated from the through hole. Further, by forming the through hole in the recess, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent the first effect member or the second effect member from spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

<Appendix 2-2>
The gaming machines in Appendix 2-2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Further, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. ..

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when forming one decoration with a plurality of staging members, there is room for improvement in that if the relative positions of the staging members deviate from each other, the aesthetic appearance of the decoration may be impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the aesthetic appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of staging members.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first moving drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right. (1) Movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300),
A second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410) and a second moving drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. (Ii) Movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500),
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that causes the first effect member and the second effect member to be close to or separated from each other by controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Either one of the first staging member or the second staging member is
It is provided with a recess (engagement recess 4214b) and has a recess (engagement recess 4214b).
Either or the other of the first staging member or the second staging member
A convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other is provided.
Either the concave portion or the convex portion is
It is provided with an inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d or inclined surface 4414d) that guides the convex portion and the concave portion so as to be in a predetermined relative position when the convex portion is fitted into the concave portion.

Further, in the recess,
A through hole (through hole 4214e) that communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the recess is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first staging member and the second staging member, and to improve the aesthetic appearance of the decoration formed by the plurality of staging members (first staging member and second staging member).

Further, the heat inside the first staging member or the second staging member in which the recess is formed can be dissipated from the through hole. Further, by forming the through hole in the recess, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent the first effect member or the second effect member from spoiling the aesthetic appearance.

<Appendix 2-3>
The gaming machines in Appendix 2-3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such a gaming machine, in general, in order to make the effect member emit light, a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) may be provided inside the effect member. When such a light emitting portion is provided, heat is generated by the light emitting portion, and it is necessary to dissipate (dissipate) the heat to the outside of the staging member. However, if a through hole for heat dissipation is formed in the staging member, there is room for improvement in that the aesthetic appearance of the staging member may be spoiled.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of ensuring the heat dissipation of the staging member without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the staging member.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first moving drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right. (1) Movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300),
A second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410) and a second moving drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. (Ii) Movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500),
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that causes the first effect member and the second effect member to be close to or separated from each other by controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Either one of the first staging member or the second staging member is
A recess (engagement recess 4214b) formed on a surface facing the first effect member and the second effect member when they are close to each other, and a recess (engagement recess 4214b).
A through hole (through hole 4214e) formed in the recess and communicating the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the recess is formed.
Is provided.

Further, either the first effect member or the second effect member, the other, may be used.
A convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other is provided.
At least one of the concave portion and the convex portion is
It is provided with an inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d and inclined surface 4414d) that guides the convex portion and the concave portion to be in a predetermined relative position when the convex portion is fitted into the concave portion.
At least one of the first effect member and the second effect member is formed in a polyhedral shape.
A light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that emits light by irradiating the inner surface of at least one of the staging members with light.
Supports (left side case 4221 and right side case 4225) that support at least one of the staging members, and
A rotation drive unit (motor 4222, output) capable of rotating the at least one of the effects members with respect to the support so that any one of the surfaces of the at least one effect member faces forward. Gear 4223, driven gear 4224, etc.) and
Further equipped,
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) fixed to the support and extended to the inside of the staging member, and
A light emitting unit (light emitting substrate 4226e) that is arranged inside the staging member and is capable of emitting light,
A fixed portion (front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d) for fixing the light emitting portion to the support portion, and
Equipped with
The fixed part is
It has a curved surface that forms a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the staging member, and holds the light emitting portion by sandwiching the light emitting portion from the front and back.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the heat dissipation of the staging member without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the staging member (first staging member or second staging member). That is, by forming a through hole in the recess, the through hole can be made inconspicuous. Further, even when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other (for example, when the surfaces facing each other are close to each other), the heat in the first effect member or the second effect member is generated. Can be discharged into the space inside the recess, so that heat dissipation can be ensured.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first staging member and the second staging member, and improve the aesthetic appearance of the decoration formed by the plurality of staging members (first staging member and second staging member). Further, the mechanism for rotating and emitting light of the staging member can be compactly configured.

<Appendix 2-4>
The gaming machines in Appendix 2-4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Some gaming machines of this type are provided with a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, Patent Document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to bring a plurality of effect members close to each other so as to be in contact with each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. be.

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, there is room for improvement in that when a plurality of staging members are brought into contact with each other, the decorations formed on the surfaces facing each other may be damaged.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing damage to decorations formed on facing surfaces when a plurality of staging members are brought close to each other. And.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right. (1) Movable accessory device (lower movable accessory 4200 and lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300),
A second effect member (upper rotating decorative body 4410) and a second moving drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. (Ii) Movable accessory device (upper movable accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500),
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that causes the first effect member and the second effect member to be close to or separated from each other by controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first staging member and the second staging member
The decoration formed on the facing surfaces of the first effect member and the second effect member facing each other when they are close to each other.
Protruding portions (projecting portions 4212a and projecting portions 4412a) formed so as to project more than the decorations formed on the facing surfaces.
Equipped with
When the first effect member and the second effect member are in close proximity,
The protrusions formed on the first effect member and the second effect member come into contact with each other.

Further, the first effect member and the second effect member are
Formed in a polyhedral shape,
The first movable accessory device is
Further, a first rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) capable of rotating the first effect member is provided.
The second movable accessory device is
A second rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) capable of rotating the second effect member is further provided.
The control unit
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, any one of the surfaces of the first effect member and one of the surfaces of the second effect member. It is possible to make one surface and one surface face each other and bring them close to each other.
The decoration and the protrusion
It is formed on the first facing surface (second surface 4212 and second surface 4412) of the surfaces of the first effect member and the second effect member.
Of the surfaces of the first effect member and the second effect member, the second facing surface (fourth surface 4214 and fourth surface 4414) different from the first facing surface has a surface.
A recess (engagement recess 4214b) provided on either one of the first effect member or the second effect member and having a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) extending toward the opening side.
A second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) provided on either the first effect member or the second effect member, which corresponds to the first inclined surface of the recess and narrows toward the tip end side. A convex portion (engaged convex portion 4414b) that has a convex portion (engaged convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion when the first effect member and the second effect member are in close proximity to each other.
Is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the decoration formed on the facing surface when the plurality of staging members are brought close to each other.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first staging member and the second staging member, and improve the aesthetic appearance of the decoration formed by the plurality of staging members (first staging member and second staging member).

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment applies also in the second embodiment will be omitted.

[Function flow]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easy to be performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that is displayed in a variable manner. For example, a "variable display" that is actually displayed in a variable manner and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. "Etc. are possible.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derivative display" is referred to as one "variable display".

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the special symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that a "big hit" has occurred, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the big hit game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal time, which is different from the big hit game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a game state in which the probability of being determined as "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable game state") and a special symbol start winning prize are easily obtained. The game state (hereinafter referred to as "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for determining symbol, etc.) acquired at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is put on hold.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the currently executed variable display of the special symbol ends. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is also referred to as a "reserved ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first starting mouth winning and second starting mouth winning) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting prize. You can get the reserved ball of. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Although not shown in FIG. 75, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the "big hit" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result is used. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (the normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 75). See processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and the hit determination as to whether or not to make a "hit" is performed. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of the above-mentioned various winnings, in particular, the possibility of winning the special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as the extraction method of various random number values, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random numbers may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Sending messages to various control circuits]
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a procedure for transmitting effect designation information (message) from the sub CPU 330, which is a host control circuit, to various control circuits 335 to 338.

As shown in FIG. 76, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information for designating the effect operation to each control circuit 335 to 338 according to the communication format of a message. A message is also called a command and is composed of, for example, 8 bytes. In the message, in order from the upper byte, "device" (1 byte), "system" (1 byte), "spare area" (2 bytes), "category" (2 bytes), "event" (2 bytes) An area for storing control information such as is provided.

The "device" stores control information for designating a device (control circuit) to which a message is sent. The "system" stores control information for executing a special operation such as a system operation of the entire sub control circuit 33 (sub control board 33 shown in FIG. 22) and a debug process. The "spare area" is reserved for spare use. In the "category", control information for dividing the effect unit is stored. The "event" mainly stores control information for setting the operation pattern of the advance notice effect. The spare area can be set to store various information according to the design of the gaming machine.

The message is transmitted from the sub CPU 330 to the designated device (control circuit) at a predetermined timing via the direct buffer according to the contents of the direct table described below. Each of the control circuits 335 to 338 that received the message controls the operation related to the effect based on the message. In this embodiment, since the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 4 is synchronized with other operations by the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, the lamp / LED 260, and the movable staging device 270, the other operations are supported. Each of the control circuits 336 to 338 receives the message and temporarily stores the message, so that the control circuit is executed one cycle later than the display operation (in the present embodiment, for example, one cycle corresponding to one frame (1 / 30s)). .. The direct buffer is an area for temporarily storing a message until it is transmitted, and is secured in, for example, a predetermined area of the work RAM 332. In the present embodiment, the acoustic control circuit 336 and the light emission control circuit 337 are separated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the acoustic / light emission control circuit may be configured by one control circuit. Further, other operations are executed with a delay of one cycle corresponding to one frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and several frames or several cycles are executed depending on the messages stacked in each control circuit 336 to 338. It may be late. Further, the transmission timing to the control circuits 336 to 338 may be controlled by the sub CPU 330 serving as the host control circuit, and each control circuit 336 to 338 may execute each control immediately after reception. In any case, the execution cycle may or may not be delayed.

The direct table is a table that defines information for generating an operation related to the effect at a predetermined timing. Here, "generating an operation related to an effect" is synonymous with transmitting a message. There are three types of direct tables: master table, slave table, and single table.

The master table is a table in which a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, and is mainly used when a decorative pattern is changed. The slave table is a table that can be registered only when the master table is registered, that is, a table that is dependent on the master table, and is mainly used for advance notice and the like. Multiple slave tables can be registered at the same time. Further, as the slave table, the same type can be registered even in different master tables. When registering the slave table, an ID number is required, and an ID number that has become an empty number may be automatically assigned. When the master table is destroyed, all the slave tables registered at that time are destroyed. A single table is a table that does not depend on (depends on) the master table or slave table, and can be registered or destroyed separately from the master table, and is used for effects that occur arbitrarily in various states such as effects related to hold. To. Multiple single tables can be registered at the same time. An ID number is also required when registering a single table, but the ID number is not automatically assigned and is registered in the specified ID number. In the present embodiment, when the master table is destroyed, all the slave tables registered at that time are destroyed, but the slave table is not limited to this and is destroyed. Only the slave table corresponding to the master table may be destroyed. Further, although a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, it is conceivable that a plurality of master tables coexist as a result of registering the master tables in order corresponding to the effect to be executed. In such a situation, for example, even if the first master table is destroyed, the second master table is not destroyed. At this time, if there is a specific slave table that is the same in the slave table dependent on the first master table and the slave table dependent on the second master table, the first master table can also be discarded. , The specific slave table may not be destroyed. Such a specific slave table can be destroyed in response to the destruction of the second master table.

For example, the direct table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds off defines the following contents.
(1) Table (master table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds off
1. 1. Call the table group for transmitting information at the start of fluctuation. If the message for starting symbol fluctuation is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for transmitting fluctuation start information) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. Set a table for preview production as a slave table in the specified ID 4.270 frame (9s) weight 5. If the message for stopping the symbol fluctuation is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for transmitting the fluctuation stop information) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 6.90 frame (3s) wait 7. End of table (destroy the master table)
(2) Table for transmitting fluctuation start information / transmission of fluctuation stop information (slave table)
-Send the message if the message for background information is set in the direct buffer-Send the message if the message for numerical symbol information is set in the direct buffer (3) Table for advance notice (slave table) )
1. 1. If the message for mini character notice is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for mini character notice) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 2.30 frame (1s) wait 3. If the SU notice message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (SU notice table) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 4. 100 frame (about 3.3 s) wait 5. If the message for advancement of dialogue is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for advance notice of dialogue) is set as a slave table, and the message for advancement of dialogue is transmitted.

According to the master table and the slave table of the above (1) to (3), the message for starting the symbol fluctuation and the message for stopping the symbol fluctuation and the background information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of 13 seconds are determined. Message for symbol information, mini character notice, SU notice, and dialogue notice are only stored in the direct buffer, and the message for starting symbol change and the message for background information and numbers are stored in the 0th frame. A message for symbol information and a message for mini character notice are sent, a message for SU notice is sent after 30 frames, a message for dialogue notice is sent after 100 frames, a message for stopping symbol fluctuation is sent after 270 frames, and Messages for background information and numerical symbol information are transmitted. As a result, a series of effect operations are executed according to the transmission (reception) timing of each message. The direct table may directly specify the type and content of the message to be transmitted.

Next, the data structure of the main control circuit 28 (main control board 28 shown in FIG. 22) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. The hit random number determination table determines either "big hit" or "miss" by lottery based on the random number value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening or the second start opening. Referenced for.

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining the lottery result performed when the starting opening prize is won. More specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, either "big hit" or "missing" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table, the winning of "big hit" and "missing" is determined for each value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data” and “loss judgment value data”) is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the gaming state is the "probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the jackpot determination random value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the first starting port or the second starting port, The "big hit" is won and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the jackpot determination random value is neither "0" to "204" at the time of winning a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port, "missing" is displayed. Winning, "missing judgment value data" is decided.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is any of "0" to "818" at the time of winning a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port, "big hit". Is elected and the "big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 819/65536 (≈1/80), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the probability change flag is "1" and the random value for jackpot determination is neither "0" to "818" at the time of winning a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port, "missing" is displayed. Winning, "missing judgment value data" is decided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port, the jackpot probability is determined depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the "probability variable gaming state". fluctuate. Specifically, the jackpot probability when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port when the game state is the "probability change game state" is about 4 when the game state is not the "probability change game state". It will be about twice as high.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two starting winning openings (first starting opening and second starting opening) are provided, and any of the first starting opening and the second starting opening is provided as a starting winning entry. Even when the game ball wins in the mouth, the big hit determination is performed with reference to the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 77. As described with reference to FIG. 22, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port is detected by the first starting port switch 311, and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port is the second starting port switch 312. Detected by.

Although not shown, both the first starting port and the second starting port are arranged below the liquid crystal display device 4 (near the position where the starting winning opening 1009 shown in FIG. 1 is arranged). The second starting port is arranged below the first starting port, and the second starting port is provided with an ordinary electric accessory (blade member). The blade member is a blade-shaped member that opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. 2 It is configured to be able to switch between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the starting port. The blade member is driven to open and close by the blade member solenoid 313 (see FIG. 22).

In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. good. Further, the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade-shaped member to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, the so-called electric tulip that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. It may be a mold or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 1p (see FIG. 1) by the player (when the so-called right-handed hit is performed), the game ball is seconded by a game nail or the like. Guided to the starting port. In this case, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win the first starting opening. As will be described later, when a prize is won in the second starting opening, it is easier to receive a lottery of "big hit" which is advantageous for the player than in the case of winning the first starting opening. Therefore, in the so-called "short-time gaming state" in which winning a prize in the second starting opening is relatively easy, the player can advance the game advantageously by performing a right-handed strike.

[Design judgment table]
FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port) stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. FIG. 78B is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (second starting port) stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. The symbol determination table (first start port) issues a "symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port and the above-mentioned determination value data. Referenced to select. The symbol determination table (second start opening) issues a "symbol command" that determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the second start opening and the above-mentioned determination value data. Referenced to select. The "symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "29", the symbol command is used. "Z0" is selected. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "30" to "35", "z1" is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "36" to "38", "z2" is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "39", "z3" is selected as the symbol command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "69", "z4" is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "70" to "73", "z5" is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "74", "z6" is selected as the symbol command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "75" to "99", "z7" is selected as the symbol command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the symbol command.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "34", the symbol is used. "Z9" is selected as the command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "35" to "64", "z10" is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "65" to "99", "z11" is selected as the symbol command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", "z12" is selected as the symbol command.

[Big hit type determination table]
79A and 79B are diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. The jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type such as the number of rounds, whether to turn on the probability variation flag, and whether to turn on the time saving flag according to the symbol command related to the jackpot. The jackpot type determination table includes a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79A (a)) referred to when a jackpot is won in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, and a jackpot in a non-probability variation game state and a time saving gaming state. The jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79A (b)) referred to when the player wins the game, and the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79B (a)) referred to when the jackpot is won in the probabilistic gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state. (See) and a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79B (b)) that is referred to when a jackpot is won in a probabilistic gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time reduction game state can be continued. That is, if the special symbol change for the number of time reductions is performed without winning the big hit in the time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state. As the number of time reductions, specifically, any one of "5 times", "35 times", "50 times", "95 times", and "next time" is determined. "Next time" means that the time-saving game state continues until the next big hit is won.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the gaming state is the "probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "0". In this embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. However, if the special symbol variation (special symbol lottery) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, the probabilistic gaming state may end and the game may shift to the non-probabilistic gaming state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "16", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "4", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined.

In this embodiment, the jackpot with the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the symbol command (that is, the jackpot determination value data), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot determination value data is used. The jackpot of the time saving flag off may be decided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of time reductions to any one of "5 times", "35 times", "50 times", "95 times", and "next time". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue until the next big hit is won, or the time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue as long as the probabilistic gaming state continues. .. Further, the number of time reductions is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B. For example, when a big hit is won in the probabilistic game state and the time reduction game state (see FIG. 79B (b)), the symbol command is "z4". , "Z5", and "z6", "50 times" may be determined as the number of time reductions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330 is controlled so that the probability change game state continues until the next big hit is won, but the probability change is not necessarily limited to this, and the probability change is up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the gaming state continues (after that, it shifts to the non-probability changing gaming state), or until the next big hit is substantially won (for example, up to 10,000 times) in relation to the winning probability of the big hit. ) It may be controlled so that the probabilistic gaming state continues, or it may be controlled so that the high probabilistic gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Variation pattern table]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a table of first half fluctuation patterns, second half fluctuation patterns, and fluctuation patterns combining these, which are stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. These tables are referred to for determining the variation pattern type and the first half and second half variation patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol command, and the like. The main CPU 280 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns to the sub control circuit 33 as fluctuation pattern designation commands. In the following description, a combination of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns is simply referred to as a "fluctuation pattern".

First, the main CPU 280 determines the type of fluctuation pattern (for example, one of nine types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and nine types of hit fluctuation patterns) based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol command, and the like, and further corresponds to the corresponding. The first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern are determined. For example, when the "normal fluctuation" of the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, "none" of the command "00H" is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and "low accuracy" of the command "00H" is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Variation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low probability variation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to such "normal fluctuation" is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 as "0000H" or "0001H" in which the commands of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are combined. The fluctuation pattern designation command may be described as, for example, "00H00H" or "00H01H".

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is the total time of the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns. For example, in the fluctuation pattern specification command "0000H", the time (4000ms) is the sum of the fluctuation time (0ms) of the first half fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (4000ms) of the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the fluctuation pattern designation command "0102H", the first half. The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (11000 ms) and the fluctuation time of the latter half fluctuation pattern (10000 ms). In this way, with regard to the fluctuation pattern, after the rough type is determined, the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are determined step by step, so that the combination of fluctuation patterns is diversified, and eventually the variation of the staging pattern can be obtained. It can be easily increased.

For convenience, FIG. 80 shows only 18 types of fluctuation patterns including hits and misses, but of course, it may be more than shown in the figure. "Pseudo 1 to 4" is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a so-called pseudo-ream. "Pseudo 1 to 4" are provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-ream such as a normal pseudo-ream or a high-speed pseudo-ream. For example, "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hits" is a fluctuation pattern in which, for example, after pseudo-continuous execution, a big hit is obtained via normal reach or SP reach. "Freeze 1 to 3" is a variation pattern corresponding to a so-called freeze effect (for example, an effect of stopping a decorative pattern in a changing manner, an effect of turning off the screen to make the decorative pattern invisible or difficult, etc.). Is. For example, "freeze 1 to 3 hits" is a fluctuation pattern in which, for example, after the freeze effect is executed, the jackpot becomes a big hit via the fluctuation related to "premier". "Low probability", "low probability time reduction", "high probability time reduction", and "latent probability" are "non-probability change game state", "non-probability change and time reduction game state", "probability change and time reduction game state", and "probability change and time reduction game state", respectively. It means "probability and non-time saving game state". It should be noted that the "latent probability" is a state in which it is uncertain which of the probabilistic gaming state and the non-probable variable gaming state is, regardless of whether it is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state (time reduction described later). It may mean mode A, time saving mode B, and normal mode (2) (see FIGS. 103 and 133).

Hereinafter, various processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 6001 are shown in FIGS. 81 to 102.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 81 shows the power-on processing by the main CPU 280. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is turned on, the main CPU 280 sets the initial value in the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned on, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power failure detection signal is ON, the main CPU 280 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and repeats the process of step S12 until the power failure detection signal is turned OFF. When the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 280 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 280 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 33 can receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a main RAM 282 provided in the main CPU 280 constituting the main control circuit 28, or a RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / launch control circuit 34 (payout / launch control board 34 shown in FIG. 22). This is a signal for instructing the clearing of the backup contents. When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power failure detection flag is set on. The power failure detection flag is a flag indicating that the power failure process has been executed in response to the occurrence of the power failure. When the power failure detection flag is set on, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S18. When the power failure detection flag is set off, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 280 checks the main RAM 282 for work area damage using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 280 performs the initial setting of the work area that requires the initial value at the time of restoration of the power failure.

Next, the main CPU 280 sets a notification about the high-probability gaming state (probability-changing gaming state) at the time of restoration of the power failure (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S22). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the power-on process.

In step S23, the main CPU 280 performs a process of clearing the work area of the main RAM 282.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of initializing the RWM (main RAM) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S25).

Next, the main CPU 280 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S26). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 82 shows the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 280. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 282 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 280 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 33 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 33 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game processed in the main control circuit 28, the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, the hall computer, and the like. ..

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S37). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 83 shows the switch input detection process by the main CPU 280. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 1013 is set.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a prize in the large winning opening 1011 (first large winning opening or second large winning opening) is set.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs the ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector (passing gate). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 84 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 280. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port winning ball sensor 311 (first start port switch 311 shown in FIG. 22) (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor 311, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor 311, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 280 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 280 acquires a jackpot determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 282 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table (first start port), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the big hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, and the stop display is scheduled. Determine the symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol of.

Next, the main CPU 280 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined based on the symbol command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S58). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 33 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 312 (second start opening switch 312 shown in FIG. 22) (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 312, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor 312, the main CPU 280 ends the starting opening winning ball detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S62. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 280 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 280 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 280 acquires a jackpot determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 282 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the big hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, the hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table (second start port), and the jackpot type. With reference to the decision table, the symbol command and the like related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Next, the main CPU 280 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol based on the symbol command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S66). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 33 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 85 shows the fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU 280. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above.
As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the table pattern, the jackpot determination random value, and the symbol random value, and performs a process of selecting the variation pattern type. (Step S71). The game state transition table is a table referred to for shifting the game state based on the symbol command, the table pattern, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game state, and is stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. ing. The variation pattern selection table is divided into an off-time and a hit-time, and is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern according to various gaming states, and is stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. ..

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of selecting the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns from the selected fluctuation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern determination process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 86 shows the main control main process by the main CPU 280. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 6001, the main CPU 280 performs the initial setting process (step S81), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 280 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 280 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol control process (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol control process (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a symbol display device control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 280 uses the special symbol display devices 5C and 5D (the second shown in FIG. 22) according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 282 in steps S83 and S84. 1 Performs a process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D) and the ordinary symbol display device 5A (ordinary symbol display unit 5A shown in FIG. 22) in the main RAM 282. As a result, the main CPU 280 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display devices 5C, 5D and the normal symbol display device 5A, and the special symbol display devices 5C, 5D and the normal symbol display device 5A are special based on the received control signal. Variable display and stop display of symbols and ordinary symbols.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a game information data generation process (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 280 generates a game state command related to the game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, and the hall computer, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 282.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 280 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 282. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 87 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 280. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 282. The main CPU 280 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 87, the main CPU 280 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 280 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 282. The main CPU 280 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S92 to S100, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process from step S92 to step S100 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 280 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 82) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 280 checks the reserved number of variable display of the special symbol when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, and when the reserved number is not “0”. (When there is a reserved ball), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol variation pattern determination result, etc. obtained in the start opening winning detection process are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (step S93) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 280 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S93). In this process, in the main CPU 280, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag displays the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 280 determines that the big hit is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. Determine if the result is a "big hit". When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 280 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 280 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S95). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the main CPU 280 is the first. In order to open the 1st big winning opening or the 2nd big winning opening, the variable positioned in the main RAM 282 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 281. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30) of the large winning opening. Second) is set in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening, the main CPU 280 is on the condition that the number of winning opening counters is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and is open. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 280 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 282 in order to close the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Then, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S97) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the large winning opening set in step S97 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 280 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 280 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 280 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 280 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S98). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 280 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 280 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S96) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33.

Further, when the main CPU 280 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 280 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S99). In this process, in the main CPU 280, the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed after the process of step S99.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends or when the "miss" is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 280 stores and updates the data indicating the number of pending numbers (start storage information) by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 280 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variation of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, various values are sequentially set in the control state flag to advance the special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 280 sets the control status flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 280 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variation time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 280 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variation time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 280 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S57), and large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing (step S98) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 280 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S97), big hit end interval processing (step S99), and special symbol game end processing (step S100). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 93 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 86 also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 88 shows a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 280. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 280 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 282 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is not "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S114. When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 280 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 282. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is changing or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing second special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning a prize at the second start opening. ..

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 280 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 33. After that, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 33.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a jackpot determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 280 is extracted at the time of winning the start opening, and is set to the random number value for jackpot determination previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is acquired by referring to the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 77). Then, the main CPU 280 determines (hit determination) whether the "big hit" or the "loss" is won based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, the main CPU 280 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S120. When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 280 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 282. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing or pending. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the first start opening. ..

Next, the special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 280 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 33. After that, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 280 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 280 transmits a demo display command to the sub-control circuit 33. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 89 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 280. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation start waiting time) after the fluctuation is confirmed set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S136. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 280 performs the time saving number subtraction process. The time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S135). When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S136, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S137.

In step S137, the main CPU 280 performs a process of clearing the time reduction state change number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 282 (step S140). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33.

Next, the main CPU 280 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 79A and 79B), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol command) to the main RAM 282. Is set to, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time reduction number subtraction process]
FIG. 90 shows the time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 280. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is 0 (step S151). The time saving state fluctuation counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time saving number becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction state fluctuation counter is 0, the main CPU 280 ends the time reduction number subtraction process. If the value of the time reduction state fluctuation counter is not 0, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S152.

In step S152, the main CPU 280 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter.

Next, the main CPU 280 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction state change number counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction state change number counter is 0, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction state fluctuation counter is not 0, the main CPU 280 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 91 shows the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 280. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161: NO), the main CPU 280 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 280 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 280 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The LED pattern flag for displaying the number of times the large winning opening is opened is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 280 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and opens and closes the first prize opening or the second prize opening periodically a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag to indicate whether or not to make it. When the first prize opening or the second prize opening is periodically opened and closed even in one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 33.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 282 (step S166).

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S167). If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S168. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S169.

In step S168, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

In step S169, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction state fluctuation number counter (step S170).

Next, the main CPU 280 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S171). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 92 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 280. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (step S183). When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S184. When the value of the probability change flag is "0", the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 93 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 280. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 93 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 282. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 280 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 280 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 280 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 282. The main CPU 280 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of step S162 to step S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 280 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 82) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 280 checks the number of pending normal symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S192.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 280, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol change time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 280 is hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 280 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, by this process, it is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 280 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in step S194, the main CPU 280 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 280 is a condition that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory is being opened when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process. , And, it is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory has passed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 280 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 282 in order to close the blade-shaped member which is an ordinary electric accessory. Then, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 280 reduces the data indicating the number of pending variable display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 280 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 33 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The main process of this sub-control circuit is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 330 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of startup, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power failure process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes the operation means input process (step S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes the command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is composed of each process related to the effect. As shown in FIG. 95, when each process of the effect mode determination process determines an aspect related to the effect such as a variable effect pattern, an effect pattern, a preview effect content, an effect effect, etc., the effect is shown. Information is generated.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. As shown in FIG. 95, in the command transmission process, the above-mentioned message (effect designation information) is generated based on the effect information, and this message is transmitted to each control circuit.

Next, the display control circuit 335 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 335 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

Next, the acoustic control circuit 336 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the acoustic control circuit 336 performs voice control for causing the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

Next, the light emission control circuit 337 executes the LED control process (step S209). In this process, the light emission control circuit 337 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the lamp / LED 260 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

Next, the staging device control circuit 338 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the staging device control circuit 338 performs drive control for operating the movable staging device 270 based on the message (staging designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of step S202 to step S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 96 shows a button input interrupt process by the sub CPU 330. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub-control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the timer for measurement. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch (sensors provided in the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B shown in FIG. 22). (Step S221). When there is an input signal from the effect button switch, the sub CPU 330 moves to the process of step S222. When there is no input signal from the effect button switch, the sub CPU 330 ends the button input interrupt process.

In step S222, the sub CPU 330 determines the operation state of the effect buttons (operation button 2000 and the push button 3000) based on the input signal from the effect button switch, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operation means input processing]
FIG. 97 shows the operation means input process by the sub CPU 330. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 acquires the operation state based on the information indicating the operation state (step S231). The operation state includes the number of times the effect button is pressed, the rotation direction, the rotation angle, and the rotation speed in the case of the jog dial. The staging effect is determined according to the operating state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the operation means input process.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 98 shows a command analysis process by the sub CPU 330. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 332 after receiving from the main control circuit 28 (main CPU 280) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 330 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (whether or not there is a dialogue notice, whether or not there is a SU notice, etc.) is selected as the effect pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process that has been separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission process]
FIG. 99 shows a command transmission process by the sub CPU 330. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 335 to 338 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 330 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 332. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes the direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in the predetermined area of the work RAM 332 based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

Next, the sub CPU 330 executes the message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 330 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 335 to 338. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 100 shows a message setting process by the sub CPU 330. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 sets the devices (control circuits 335 to 338) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of setting whether or not to operate the system (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuit 335 to 338) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 101 shows the direct table registration process by the sub CPU 330. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 102 shows a message transmission process by the sub CPU 330. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 330 sends a message to each device (control circuit 335 to 338) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 330 ends the message transmission process.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of an effect mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 103 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the embodiment of the present invention.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode (sub-game state) as shown in FIG. 103 (a) is managed by the sub-control circuit 33. As the effect mode, a normal mode, a big hit mode, a time saving mode A, a time saving mode B, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided. Although not shown, as the jackpot mode, a first jackpot mode and a second jackpot mode are provided.

More specifically with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), when the jackpot gaming state starts in the normal mode (see step S140 in FIG. 89), the sub-control circuit 33 changes from the normal mode to the jackpot mode. The effect mode is shifted to (see transition condition (1)).

Similarly, when the jackpot gaming state starts in the time saving mode A, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the time saving mode A to the jackpot mode (see the transition condition (3)). Further, when the big hit game state starts in the time saving mode B, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the time saving mode B to the big hit mode (see the transition condition (6)).

Further, when the jackpot gaming state starts in the first special mode or the second special mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the first special mode or the second special mode to the jackpot mode (transition condition (10)). reference). Specifically, when the jackpot gaming state starts in the first special mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the first special mode to the first jackpot mode. When the jackpot gaming state starts in the second special mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the second special mode to the second jackpot mode.

When the jackpot gaming state ends (see FIG. 91), the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the jackpot mode to the time saving mode A, the first special mode, or the second special mode (transition condition (2). ) And (9).

Specifically, when the transition condition to the first special mode is satisfied during the jackpot mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode. When the condition for shifting to the second special mode is satisfied during the jackpot mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode. When both the transition condition to the first special mode and the transition condition to the second special mode are not satisfied during the jackpot mode, the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the time saving mode A. Although not shown in FIG. 103, as will be described later, the sub-control circuit 33 may shift the effect mode from the jackpot mode to the time saving mode B.

The transition condition to the first special mode and the transition condition to the second special mode are established by performing an effect (probability change confirmation effect) that can be executed only when the probability change jackpot is obtained. The probability change confirmation effect will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, the first special mode (first jackpot mode) is performed at any timing such as during the jackpot gaming state, before the start of the jackpot gaming state, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, during the reduced working hours gaming state, and during the normal gaming state. ) And the second special mode (second big hit mode), the player can select which of the production modes to play the game.

When the time saving game state ends in the time saving mode A (see step S154 in FIG. 90), the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the time saving mode A to the normal mode (see the transition condition (4)). On the other hand, if the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the jackpot gaming state is completed without ending the time saving game state in the time saving mode A, the sub-control circuit 33 changes from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B. And shift the production mode (see transition condition (5)). Although not shown, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the jackpot game state is completed without ending the time-saving game state in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving mode A, the sub-control circuit 33 , The effect mode may be shifted from the time saving mode A to the special mode (first special mode or second special mode).

When the time saving game state ends in the time saving mode B (see step S154 in FIG. 90), the sub-control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the time saving mode B to the normal mode (see the transition condition (7)). On the other hand, if the special symbol change is performed a specific number of times (35 times, 95 times, etc.) after the jackpot gaming state is completed without ending the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode B, the sub-control circuit 33 starts from the time-saving mode B. The effect mode is shifted to the first special mode or the second special mode (see transition condition (8)). That is, the time-saving gaming state continues even in the special mode (first special mode or second special mode). As a result of the lottery for selecting the variable effect pattern or the look-ahead effect pattern, the time saving mode B to the special mode (first special mode or second special mode) is provided on condition that the lottery for shifting the effect mode is won. The production mode may be shifted to the mode).

In the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the transition condition to the first special mode or the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied during the jackpot mode, the special mode (first special mode or the second special mode) is shortened. In some cases, the mode A or the time saving mode B may be shifted, and the special mode is an effect mode that can be selected according to the probability variation jackpot.

<Big hit medium plate acquisition process>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a jackpot medium plate acquisition process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a process during a normal round performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the process during the interval performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a plate acquisition round processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a plate acquisition result display process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing a navigation lottery table. FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the aura and the probability variation reliability in the question mark with an aura. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the plate acquisition result.

The jackpot medium plate acquisition process shown in FIG. 104 shifts to the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot gaming state starts (with the first special mode selected) in the first special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)). This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub-control circuit 33 during the mode (first jackpot mode). The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts by receiving the jackpot start command (see step S140 in FIG. 89).

In the jackpot middle plate acquisition process, first, the sub CPU 330 of the sub control circuit 33 determines whether or not the round game is in progress (step S1001). The sub CPU 330 recognizes that the round game is in progress by receiving a command from the main control circuit 28 corresponding to the round game (processing during opening of the large winning opening shown in step S96 of FIG. 87). Can be done.

If it is determined that the round game is in progress, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current round game is a plate acquisition round game (step S1002). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines that the current round game is a plate acquisition round game when the plate acquisition round flag (see step S1045 in FIG. 106) is set to ON. ..

If it is determined that the round game currently being performed is not a round game for acquiring a plate, the sub CPU 330 executes a process during a normal round (step S1003). The processing during the normal round will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game currently being performed is a round game for plate acquisition, the sub CPU 330 executes a process during the plate acquisition round (step S1004). The process during the plate acquisition round will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the game is not in the round game (that is, in the interval between rounds), the sub CPU 330 executes the processing during the interval (step S1005). The processing during the interval will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

After executing the process of step S1003, step S1004, or step S1005, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during normal round>
The process during the normal round shown in FIG. 105 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1003 of FIG. 104.

In the process during the normal round, the sub CPU 330 first determines whether or not the attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening) has won a prize (step S1021). In this process, whether or not the sub CPU 330 has received a command (attacker winning command) transmitted from the main control circuit 28 when the game ball enters the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. To judge.

If it is determined that it is not the time for the attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening) to win, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the attacker (first major winning opening or second major winning opening) has won a prize, the sub CPU 330 executes a navigation lottery (step S1022). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the content of the navigation by performing a lottery based on a random number value with reference to the navigation lottery table (see FIG. 109 (a)).

In the navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 109 (a), the contents of the navigation ("Yellow 7 Navi", "Hatena Navi", and "Rainbow Hatena Navi") correspond to each of the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot. The lottery price is specified. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, "Hatena Navi" or "Rainbow Hatena Navi" is more likely to be determined than in the case of a normal jackpot.

The normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the non-probable variable gaming state, and the probabilistic jackpot is the jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, as normal jackpots, jackpots corresponding to the symbol commands "z4", "z5", "z6", and "z11" (4R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot) ) Is provided, and as the probability variation jackpot, the jackpot corresponding to the symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z7", "z9", and "z10" (4R probability variation jackpot) And 16R probability variation jackpot) are provided.

After executing the process of step S1022, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the navigation lottery has been won (step S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines that the navigation lottery has been won when the content of the navigation determined by the navigation lottery is "Hatena Navi" or "Rainbow Hatena Navi".

If it is determined that the navigation lottery has not been won ("Yellow 7 Navi" has been decided), the sub CPU 330 has an image corresponding to "Yellow 7 Navi" (the image with the number "7" in yellow). Is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect designation information (step S1024). After that, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the navigation lottery has been won ("Hatena Navi" or "Rainbow Hatena Navi" has been decided), the sub CPU 330 has an image corresponding to "Hatena Navi" or "Rainbow Hatena Navi" (Hatena mark "Hatena Mark". The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the image with a predetermined color or a rainbow color in "?" (Step S1025).

Next, the sub CPU 330 adds 1 to the value of the navigation number counter (step S1026). The value of the navigation number counter indicates the number of times the navigation lottery has been won, and is stored in the work RAM 332. The value of the navigation number counter is cleared (set to "0") when the jackpot game state ends. After executing the process of step S1026, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during interval>
The inter-interval process shown in FIG. 106 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1005 of FIG. 104.

In the process during the interval, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the "question mark" (see step S1025 in FIG. 105) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (whether or not the navigation lottery is won) in the latest round game. Determine (step S1041).

When it is determined that the "question mark" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the latest round game, the sub CPU 330 changes the color of the aura in the "question mark with aura" (step S1042). In this process, the sub CPU 330 displays the "question mark with an aura" on the liquid crystal display device 4 in such a manner as to emit an aura to the surroundings, and also directs the display control circuit 335 so that the aura has a predetermined color. Send the specified information.

The "question mark with aura" displayed in this process is different from the "question mark" displayed in step S1025 of FIG. 105. The "question mark" is displayed for a short time (for example, less than 1 second) near the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see "question mark 6101" shown in FIG. 111 (b)), whereas the "question mark" is "aura". The “question mark” is displayed near the peripheral edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see “question mark 6102” shown in FIG. 111 (c)). Also, once the "question mark with aura" is displayed, the "question mark with aura" is displayed continuously (until the round game for acquiring the plate starts), and the color of the aura changes step by step. The liquid crystal display device 4 is controlled so as to do so.

The color of the aura in the "Hatena mark with aura" is one of white, blue, green, purple, red, and iridescent, in the order of white, blue, green, purple, red, and iridescent. , The probability variation reliability is high (see FIG. 109 (b)). The probability variation reliability is the probability that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, and the color of the aura is an index showing how much the current jackpot can be expected to be a probability variation jackpot.

In the process of step S1042, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the color of the aura in the “question mark with aura” is raised by one step. As a result, if the aura of the already displayed "Hatena mark with aura" is white, the color of the aura is changed to blue, and the aura of the already displayed "Hatena mark with aura" is blue. In that case, the color of the aura is changed to green, and if the aura of the already displayed "Hatena mark with aura" is green, the color of the aura is changed to purple and the already displayed "aura". If the aura of the "Hatena Mark" is purple, the color of the aura is changed to red, and if the aura of the "Hatena Mark with Aura" that has already been displayed is red, the color of the aura is rainbow. Will be changed to.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic jackpot, "Hatena Navi" or "Rainbow Hatena Navi" is more likely to be determined than in the case of the normal jackpot (see FIG. 109 (a)). As a result, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the color of the aura in the "question mark with aura" is more likely to be changed to a color with higher probabilistic reliability than in the case of a normal jackpot.

When the "question mark" is displayed for the first time in one round game (for example, the third round) during the jackpot game state (for example, the "question mark" is not displayed in the first and second rounds). Case) At that time, the "question mark with aura" is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. In this case, in the process of step S1042 during the inter-round interval (for example, the interval occurring between the third round and the fourth round) that shifts after the end of the one round game, the sub CPU 330 has a white aura. The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so that the "question mark with aura" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

If it is determined in step S1041 that the "question mark" was not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the latest round game, is the value of the navigation number counter (see step S1026 in FIG. 105) larger than 0 in the sub CPU 330? It is determined whether or not (step S1043). When it is determined that the value of the navigation number counter is 0, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

After executing the process of step S1042, or when it is determined in step S1043 that the value of the navigation number counter is larger than 0, the sub CPU 330 generates the inter-round interval this time between the 11th round and the 12th round. It is determined whether or not the interval is to be performed (step S1044).

If it is determined that the interval between rounds this time is not the interval that occurs between the 11th round and the 12th round, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval between the current rounds is the interval generated between the 11th round and the 12th round, the sub CPU 330 sets the plate acquisition round flag to ON (step S1045). The plate acquisition round flag is a flag indicating that the plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111 (d) to (f)) is being performed, and when the plate acquisition round is completed (for example, FIG. After executing the process of step S1067 of 107, it is set to off at the end of the 15th round, at the end of the jackpot game state, and the like). After executing the process of step S1045, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the round for plate acquisition>
The plate acquisition round process shown in FIG. 107 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1004 of FIG. 104.

In the plate acquisition round in-process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the currently playing round game is the 12th round game (step S1061).

When it is determined that the round game currently being performed is the twelfth round game, the sub CPU 330 outputs the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the plate acquisition effect start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Transmission (step S1062). The plate acquisition effect start image is an image showing that the plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111 (d) to (f)) starts. After executing the process of step S1062, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1061 that the currently played round game is not the twelfth round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the currently played round game is the thirteenth round game (step). S1063).

When it is determined that the round game currently being performed is the 13th round game, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the plate acquisition mission is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (. Step S1064). The plate acquisition mission is an image for guiding the player about the acquisition of the plate. After executing the process of step S1064, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1063 that the currently played round game is not the 13th round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the currently played round game is the 14th round game (step). S1065).

When it is determined that the round game currently being performed is the 14th round game, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step). S1066). The button image is an image imitating an effect button (operation button 2000 or press button 3000). As the button image, a plurality of images having different colors and sizes are provided, and one of the plurality of button images is selected and displayed by lottery. The ease of selection of each button image differs depending on whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot. After executing the process of step S1066, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1065 that the round game currently being played is not the 14th round game, the sub CPU 330 executes the plate acquisition result display process (step S1067). The plate acquisition result display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. After executing the process of step S1067, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Plate acquisition result display processing>
The plate acquisition result display process shown in FIG. 108 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1067 of FIG. 107.

In the plate acquisition result display processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (step S1081). Since the jackpot start command (see step S140 in FIG. 89) transmitted from the main control circuit 28 contains information indicating the type of jackpot (symbol command shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B), the jackpot start command is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 330 can recognize the type of jackpot.

When it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the sub CPU 330 causes the display control circuit 335 to display an image (successful image) indicating that the plate has been successfully acquired on the liquid crystal display device 4. Is transmitted (step S1082).

Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1083). The first special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the first special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the first special mode shifts to the case where an effect (probability change confirmation effect) that can be executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed is performed. do. The effect of displaying an image (successful image) indicating that the plate has been successfully acquired on the liquid crystal display device 4 (the effect performed by step S1082) is a probability change confirmation effect. When the first special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

When the probability change confirmation effect is performed, in the subsequent big hit mode, an image of the same system as the image (for example, the background image) displayed in the effect mode (special mode) that shifts after the end of the big hit game state is displayed. It may be displayed. Of course, even in this case, an image different from the image displayed in the special mode may be displayed. After executing the process of step S1083, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1081 that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot, the sub CPU 330 causes the display control circuit 335 to display an image (failed image) indicating that the acquisition of the plate has failed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The effect designation information is transmitted (step S1084).

After executing the process of step S1084, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

In FIGS. 107 and 108, a button image is displayed in the 14th round (see step S1066 in FIG. 107), and a plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed in the 15th and 16th rounds (FIG. 107). It has been described as (see step S1082 and step S1084) of 108. The display timing of the plate acquisition result is not limited to this example, and for example, a success image or a failure image may be displayed before the start of the fifteenth round.

FIG. 110 shows the relationship between the end timing of the 14th round and the start timing of the 15th round and the button effective time. The button valid time is the period during which the button image is displayed, and when the effect button is operated during the button valid time, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed at the timing when the operation is performed. To. If the effect button is not operated during the button valid time, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed at the timing when the button valid time ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 110, the button effective time starts when a certain time has elapsed from the start of the 14th round (from the start of the 14th round to the start of the button effective time). The time is constant). In addition, the length of the button effective time is also constant.

Here, as described above, in one round game, a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening), Or, it ends when the elapse of the predetermined time) is established. That is, the length of one round game is a predetermined time at the longest, and the number of game balls that have won the first prize opening or the second prize opening has reached the predetermined number by the time when the predetermined time elapses. In that case, the round game ends at that point. That is, the length of the round game varies depending on the time required for the number of game balls winning in the first prize opening or the second prize opening to reach a predetermined number.

On the premise of this, FIG. 110A shows a case where the button valid time ends before the end of the 14th round. FIG. 110B shows a case where the button valid time ends during the interval occurring between the 14th round and the 15th round. FIG. 110 (c) shows a case where the button valid time starts after the end of the 14th round (during the interval occurring between the 14th round and the 15th round) and the button valid time ends after the start of the 15th round. Shows.

In the example of FIG. 110A, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during the 14th round regardless of whether or not the effect button is operated and the operation timing. In the example of FIG. 110 (b), if the effect button is operated by the end of the 14th round, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during the 14th round, and the 14th round is displayed. If the effect button is not operated by the end, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) will be displayed during the interval generated between the 14th round and the 15th round. In the example of FIG. 110 (c), if the effect button is operated before the start of the 15th round, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure) during the interval occurring between the 14th round and the 15th round. (Image) is displayed, and if the effect button is not operated by the start of the 15th round, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) will be displayed during the 15th round.

In the example of FIG. 110 (c), if the effect button is not operated before the start of the 15th round, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) may be displayed at the start of the 15th round. good. Further, as will be described later, during the round game, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the end mark 6101 (FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b) displayed during the round game are displayed on the upper part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4. ) Is displayed. In the example of FIG. 110 (c), the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 even after the fifteenth round has started. Therefore, in this case, after the display of the button image is finished (the button effective time is finished), the history may be displayed from the middle of the 15th round.

<Direction during the 1st jackpot mode>
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device during the first jackpot mode.

In the present embodiment, the first big hit mode shifts to the case where a big hit occurs in the first special mode, and the first special mode among the first special mode and the second special mode is selected by the player. Then, even if a big hit occurs in an effect mode other than the first special mode (normal mode, time saving mode A, time saving mode B, or second special mode), the mode shifts to the first big hit mode. In addition, in FIG. 111, the character "first big hit mode" is shown for the sake of easy understanding, and the character image may not be actually displayed.

In the first big hit mode, every time a game ball wins an attacker (first big winning opening or second big winning opening) (see step S1021 in FIG. 105), it is shown in FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b). As shown, the yellow 7 image 6100 or the question mark 6101 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The yellow 7 image 6100 is an image in which the number “7” is yellowed (see step S1024 in FIG. 105), and the question mark 6101 is a question mark “?” In a predetermined color or rainbow color. It is an image (see step S1025 of FIG. 105). FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b) show that the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6101 are displayed in a stationary manner, respectively. In the present embodiment, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6100 are displayed. Each of the marks 6101 is displayed in such a manner that it falls from above. That is, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6101 are displayed while moving, respectively.

Which of the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6101 is displayed is determined by the navigation lottery (see step S1022 in FIG. 105). In FIG. 105, it has been described that a navigation lottery is performed every time a game ball wins an attacker (first big winning opening or second big winning opening). As described above, in the present embodiment, one round game ends on condition that 10 game balls have won the attacker (the maximum number of game balls that can be won by the attacker in one round game). Since the number is 10), according to this, the question mark 6101 can be displayed up to 10 times (although the probability is very low) in one round game.

However, an upper limit may be set for the number of times that the question mark 6101 can be displayed in one round game. For example, in one round game, the number of times the navigation lottery can be won is limited to one, and after winning the navigation lottery once in one round game, the navigation lottery is executed until the round game ends. It may be configured not to. According to this, the number of times that the question mark 6101 can be displayed in one round game is 0 or 1.

When the "2400 plate" (or "4800 plate" described later) is already displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 at the time when the big hit game state starts (step S1105, step S1109, step S1112, step S1112 in FIG. 112). S1116 and step S1120) may be configured not to execute the navigation lottery (so that the yellow 7 image 6100 is displayed every time).

As described above, in the round game, it is short that the yellow 7 image 6100 or the question mark 6101 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b) near the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4. Only time (eg, less than 1 second). On the other hand, although not shown, the history of the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6101 displayed during the round game is a display mode smaller than that of FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b), and the yellow 7 image is displayed. The 6100 and the question mark 6101 are displayed in a horizontal row at the upper part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4. When the round game ends and the interval shifts to the inter-round interval, the display of the yellow 7 image 6100 and the question mark 6101 displayed in the horizontal row disappears.

Then, during the inter-round interval, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the aura-attached question mark 6102 (see step S1042 in FIG. 106) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Specifically, in the interval that occurs between the Nth round and the (N + 1) round (for example, the interval that occurs between the third round and the fourth round), the first round to the Nth round (for example, the first round). The question mark 6102 with an aura is displayed on condition that the question mark 6101 is displayed at least once in the first round to the third round). The aura-attached end mark 6102 has an aura 6103, and the aura 6103 has any one of a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, or iridescent). .. The color of the aura 6103 can be changed according to the number of times the question mark 6101 is displayed (for example, the value of the navigation number counter (see step S1026 in FIG. 105)).

Further, during the interval between rounds, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the prize ball number image 6104 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The prize ball number image 6104 is an image corresponding to the character "150 GET", and indicates that 150 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the latest round game. In the present embodiment, every time a game ball wins an attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening), 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in one round game, a maximum of 150 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

When the twelfth round is entered with the aura-attached question mark 6102 displayed, the plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111 (d) to (f)) starts. First, in the twelfth round, the plate acquisition effect start image (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1062 in FIG. 107). Subsequently, in the thirteenth round, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), the plate acquisition mission 6105 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1064 in FIG. 107). The plate acquisition mission 6105 is an image for guiding the player to the effect that the "2400 plate" may be acquired by operating the effect button (operation button 2000 or press button 3000). Subsequently, in the 14th round, a button image (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1066 in FIG. 107).

After that, in the 15th round and the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 111 (e), the prize ball number image 6106 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The prize ball number image 6106 is an image corresponding to the number "2400". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (f), the "2400" plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The "2400" plate 6110 has the appearance of the number "2400" drawn on the surface of the plate (plate-like member). The prize ball number image 6106 and the "2400" plate 6110 both contain the number "2400".

Here, the prize ball number image 6106 and the "2400" plate 6110 are images (successful images) showing that the plate has been successfully acquired (see step S1082 in FIG. 108), and the display of the images is a probability variation jackpot. It is a kind of effect (probability change confirmation effect) that can be executed only when it becomes. As described above, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends becomes the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the ordinary electric accessory (blade member) provided in the second starting port is likely to be in an open state, and as a result, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port. The jackpot generated when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port is either a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R normal jackpot (FIG. 78 (b), and 79A and 79B).

Therefore, assuming a situation in which a big hit occurs multiple times after the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state are set, the big hit that occurs when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting opening does not intervene. As long as the big hits that occur when the game ball wins at the second starting port are continuous, the big hits that can occur in the situation are either 16R probable big hits, 4R probable big hits, or 16R normal big hits. It turns out that. Then, in order to shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to generate a normal jackpot, but since the normal jackpot is only a 16R normal jackpot, the probabilistic gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. In hitting, you will definitely go through the 16R jackpot. That is, if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can obtain a prize ball corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and even if the 16R probability variation jackpot does not occur, the player can obtain the prize ball. , 16R Based on the normal jackpot, a prize ball corresponding to the 16R jackpot can be obtained. As described above, assuming that 150 game balls are paid out as prize balls in one round game, the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the 16R jackpot is 15 × 10 × 16 = 2400. Become. The number "2400" included in the prize ball number image 6106 and the "2400" plate 6110 means this.

<Processing at the time of big hit>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a jackpot processing performed in the sub-control circuit.

In the jackpot processing shown in FIG. 112, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is displayed in a specific display mode (display mode corresponding to the jackpot), the sub-control circuit 33 determines the effect mode (FIG. This is the process performed in step S205 of 94).

In the jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the first special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) (step S1101). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 332, and the sub CPU 330 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done. The jackpot processing shown in FIG. 112 is a processing performed when the decorative symbol is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot, but when the processing in step S1101 is performed, the mode is still shifted to the jackpot mode. However, the transition to the jackpot mode is performed after the jackpot processing is completed.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the current effect mode is the first special mode, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a 4R probability variation jackpot (step S1102).

When it is determined that the jackpot this time is a 4R probability variation jackpot, the sub CPU 330 changes the "2400 plate" to the "3000 plate" (step S1103). As described above, the "2400 plate" (see FIG. 111 (f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a probability change confirmation effect (an effect that can be executed only when a probability change jackpot occurs) during the jackpot game state. In that case, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game state becomes the first special mode (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). The display of "2400 plate" continues even after the end of the big hit game state, and the display of "2400 plate" continues until the next big hit occurs. As a result, the "2400 plate" is displayed even at the time when the process of step S1103 is performed. In the process of step S1103, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of the "2400 plate" and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the "3000 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the image corresponding to the number "600" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1104).

Next, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of the "3000 plate" and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the "2400 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 again (step S1105).

Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1106). As described above, the first special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the first special mode is satisfied (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). When the first special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

After executing the process of step S1106, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1102 that the current jackpot is not a 4R probability variation jackpot, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the "4800 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1107).

When it is determined that the "4800 plate" is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to end the display of the "2400 plate" (step S1108). .. As a result, the display of "2400 plate" disappears, and the player decides to play the game with the aim of acquiring "2400 plate" again (expecting that this big hit is a probable change big hit). Become. Specifically, as a result of performing the jackpot medium plate acquisition process (see FIGS. 104 to 108), the "2400 plate" is displayed again on the liquid crystal display device 4 on condition that the plate acquisition is successful. Become.

After executing the process of step S1108, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the "4800 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of the "4800 plate" and causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display the "2400 plate". , The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1109).

Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1110). As a result, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as in the case of the 4R probability variation jackpot (see step S1106).

After executing the process of step S1110, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the current effect mode is not the first special mode, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a predetermined symbol combination (for example, V alignment). (Step S1111).

When it is determined that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, V alignment), the sub CPU 330 displays the "4800 plate" so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The effect designation information is transmitted to the control circuit 335 (step S1112).

Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1113). As a result, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as in the case of the 4R probability variation jackpot (see step S1106).

After executing the process of step S1113, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1111 that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is not a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, V alignment), the sub CPU 330 determines that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a combination of decorative symbols. Is determined whether or not is a specific symbol combination (for example, G alignment) (step S1114).

When it is determined that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific combination of symbols (for example, G alignment), the sub CPU 330 displays the "7200 plate" so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The effect designation information is transmitted to the control circuit 335 (step S1115).

Next, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of the "7200 plate" and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the "4800 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1116).

Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1117). As a result, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as in the case of the 4R probability variation jackpot (see step S1106).

After executing the process of step S1117, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1114 that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is not a specific symbol combination (for example, G alignment), the sub CPU 330 executes a plate acquisition lottery (step S1118). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Specifically, the sub CPU 330 always determines that the jackpot is not won when the jackpot is a normal jackpot, while the sub CPU 330 has a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot. It will be decided to win.

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the plate acquisition lottery has been won (step S1119). If it is determined that the plate acquisition lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine. As a result, as in the case where the 4R probability variation jackpot is not obtained in the first special mode (see step S1108), the jackpot gaming state starts with the "2400 plate" not displayed, and the player is asked to "2400 plate". Aiming to win (expecting that this big hit is a probable change big hit), we will play a game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate acquisition lottery has been won, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the "2400 plate" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1120).

Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1121). As a result, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as in the case of the 4R probability variation jackpot (see step S1106).

After executing the process of step S1121, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Direction at the time of big hit (3000 plates)>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a big hit occurs during the first special mode.

As described above, when the "2400" plate 6110 (see FIG. 111 (f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot gaming state (first jackpot mode), the effect mode after the jackpot gaming state ends is set. The first special mode is set (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). Then, the "2400" plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during the first special mode. FIG. 113A also shows how the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the first special mode. Although detailed illustration is omitted, during the first special mode, the "2400" plate 6110 continues to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in such a manner that the plate rotates about a straight line in the vertical direction.

FIG. 113A shows how the red 7 image 6120 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the “2400” plate 6110. The red 7 image 6120 has the same significance as the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot as an image that can be displayed only when the result of the jackpot determination is the 4R probability variation jackpot. As a result, FIG. 113A shows a state in which the 4R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the first special mode. In addition, in FIG. 113 (a), the character "first special mode" is shown for the sake of easy understanding, and the character image may not be actually displayed.

As described above, when the 4R probability variation jackpot occurs in the first special mode, the “3000” plate 6121 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in place of the “2400” plate 6110, as shown in FIG. 113 (b). See step S1103 in FIG. 112). The "3000" plate 6121 has an appearance in which the number "3000" is drawn on the surface of the plate (plate-like member), that is, the number "2400" in the "2400" plate 6110 is replaced with the number "3000". It has an appearance.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the prize ball number image 6122 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1104 in FIG. 112). The prize ball number image 6122 is an image corresponding to the number "600", and corresponds to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the big hit game state to be started from now on. As described above, in the present embodiment, every time a game ball wins an attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening), 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that in the 4R probability variation jackpot. Is paid out as a prize ball up to 600 (= 15 × 10 × 4) game balls. The number "3000" included in the "3000" plate 6121 shown in FIG. 113 (b) is the number of game balls (600) that can be paid out in the 4R probability variation jackpot that occurs this time and the 16R jackpot that will occur after the next time. It is the total number with the number of game balls (2400) that can be paid out in.

After that, when the big hit game state starts and the effect mode shifts from the first special mode to the first big hit mode, the "2400" plate 6110 is displayed again on the liquid crystal display device 4 as shown in FIG. 113 (d). (See step S1105 in FIG. 112). The display of the "2400" plate 6110 continues until the jackpot gaming state ends.

Here, the "3000" plate 6121 shown in FIG. 113 (b) and the prize ball number image 6122 shown in FIG. 113 (c) are images that can be displayed only when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs. Therefore, the display of the "3000" plate 6121 and the prize ball number image 6122 is a kind of effect (probability change definite effect) that can be executed only when the probability change big hit occurs. From this, when the "3000" plate 6121 and the prize ball number image 6122 are displayed, the "2400" plate 6110, which is also a kind of probability change confirmation effect, is displayed (see FIG. 113 (d)). The player will be notified that the jackpot has been achieved. As described above, when the "2400" plate 6110 is already displayed at the start of the jackpot gaming state, the above-mentioned jackpot medium plate acquisition process (see FIGS. 104 to 108) may not be performed.

The number "600" (the number included in the prize ball number image 6122), which is the difference between "3000" in the "3000" plate 6121 and "2400" in the "2400" plate 6110, is used as a prize ball in the 4R jackpot. In this embodiment, only the 4R probability variation jackpot is provided as the 4R jackpot that occurs when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, which corresponds to the number of game balls that can be paid out. 4R is usually not a big hit (see FIGS. 78 (b) and 79A and 79B). From such a viewpoint as well, the player can detect that the probability variation jackpot has been achieved through the "3000" plate 6121 and the prize ball number image 6122.

Further, FIG. 113 (d) shows how the total number of planned acquisitions 6123 and the current number of acquisitions 6124 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The total number of planned acquisitions 6123 corresponds to the minimum number of game balls that a player will be able to acquire before shifting to the normal gaming state after once entering the probabilistic gaming state, and the total number of acquisitions 6124 is currently acquired. Corresponds to the number of game balls that the player has already acquired. Although not shown, at the end of the previous jackpot game state, the total number of planned acquisitions 6123 and the current number of acquisitions 6124 are both 2400. In FIG. 113 (d), the current acquisition number 6124 is still 2400, while the total acquisition number 6123 is 3000 by adding the acquisitionable number (600) in the 4R probability variation jackpot.

<Direction at the time of big hit (4800 plate)>
114A to 114C are diagrams showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a V-aligned jackpot occurs.

FIG. 114A (a) shows how the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the previous special symbol change is lost. As the holding image 6131, the first holding ball image 6131a, the second holding ball image 6131b, the third holding ball image 6131c, and the fourth holding ball image 6131d are displayed. The first reserved ball image 6131a corresponds to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 6131b corresponds to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 6131c corresponds to the third reserved ball. , The fourth reserved ball image 6131d corresponds to the fourth reserved ball. The numbers (1 to 4) in the reserved image 6131 are shown for the sake of clarity, and the numbers are not actually displayed.

FIG. 114A (b) shows how the liquid crystal display device 4 performs a special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball after the state shown in FIG. 114A (a). In the figure, the changing decorative pattern 6130 is indicated by an arrow. Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. When the first reserved ball is digested, the second reserved ball is actually displayed as the first reserved ball image 6131a, and the third reserved ball is displayed as the second reserved ball image 6131b. The fourth reserved ball is displayed as the third reserved ball image 6131c, but for convenience of explanation, the second reserved ball is shown here as the second reserved ball image 6131b, and the third reserved ball is shown. The reserved ball is displayed as the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball is shown as the fourth reserved ball image 6131d. This point is the same in the following description.

FIG. 114A (c) shows a state in which "VVV" (V alignment) is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 114A (b). (See step S1111 in FIG. 112). FIG. 114A (d) shows how the “4800” plate 6140 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 after the state shown in FIG. 114A (c) (see step S1112 in FIG. 112).

The "4800" plate 6140 has the appearance of the number "4800" drawn on the surface of the plate (plate-like member), that is, the number "2400" in the "2400" plate 6110 has been replaced with the number "4800". It has an appearance. The V alignment indicates that the result of this special symbol change is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114A (d), the jackpot gaming state starts, and the display of the "4800" plate 6140 continues until the jackpot gaming state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, the effect mode becomes the first special mode (see step S1113 in FIG. 112). Even during the first special mode, the "4800" plate 6140 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Similar to the "2400" plate 6110 (see FIG. 113 (a)), in the first special mode, the "4800" plate 6140 is a liquid crystal display device in such a manner that the plate rotates about a straight line in the vertical direction. Continues to be displayed in 4.

In FIGS. 114B (a) and 114B (b), when the jackpot gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the first special mode, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. From the state, it shows that the special symbol change corresponding to the second reserved ball has started. FIG. 114B (c) shows a state in which "1-1-1" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 114B (b). Even in the states shown in FIGS. 114B (a) to 114B, the “4800” plate 6140 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. In FIG. 114B (d), after the state shown in FIG. 114B (c), the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in place of the “4800” plate 6140 (FIG. 112). Step S1109).

The combination of decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114B (d), the jackpot gaming state starts, and the display of the "2400" plate 6110 continues until the jackpot gaming state ends. When the jackpot game state ends, the effect mode becomes the first special mode (see step S1110 in FIG. 112). Even during the first special mode, the "2400" plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

In FIGS. 114C (a) and 114C (b), after the jackpot gaming state ends and the mode shifts to the first special mode, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. From the state, it shows how the special symbol change has started. In the state shown in FIGS. 114C (a) and 114C (b), the reserved image 6131 is not shown, and all the reserved balls are digested.

FIG. 114C shows a state in which "1-1-1" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 114C (b). Even in the states shown in FIGS. 114C (a) to 114C, the "2400" plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, but after the state shown in FIG. 114C (c), "2400" is displayed. The display of the plate 6110 ends (see step S1108 in FIG. 112). As described above, the combination of decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114C (c), the big hit game state starts.

FIG. 114C (d) shows how the plate acquisition mission 6105 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot gaming state. As described with reference to FIG. 111 (d), the plate acquisition mission 6105 may be able to acquire the "2400 plate" by operating the effect button (operation button 2000 or press button 3000). , It is an image to guide the player. By succeeding in the mission, the "2400" plate 6110 will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 111 (f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 114A to 114C, when "VVV" (V alignment) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols 6130, the "4800" plate 6140 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Is displayed. The V alignment can be stopped and displayed only when the result of this special symbol change is a probability variation jackpot and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is a 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). It is a decorative symbol combination (a predetermined symbol combination shown in step S1111 of FIG. 112). If a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can acquire a prize ball (2400 game balls) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot based on the 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on the 16R probability variation jackpot is completed becomes the probability variation gaming state, and as described above, during the transition from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state, the player Furthermore, a prize ball (2400 game balls) equivalent to a 16R jackpot can be obtained. The total number of these is 4800, and the number "4800" contained in the "4800" plate 6140 means this.

In the present embodiment, when the V alignment is stopped and displayed, the result of this special symbol change is a probability variation jackpot, but the number of rounds related to the jackpot is not particularly limited, and it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. It may be a 4R probability variation jackpot. When the result of this special symbol change is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the player can acquire a prize ball (2400 game balls) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot based on the 16R probability variation jackpot. From the player's point of view, the number "4800" contained in the "4800" plate 6140 corresponds to the number of game balls (2400) that can be obtained based on the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the fluctuation and the reserved balls. It can also be seen as showing the total number of game balls (2400) that can be obtained based on the 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, the number "4800" included in the "4800" plate 6140 is the number of game balls (2400) that can be acquired based on the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the fluctuation, and the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the reserved ball. It can also be seen as showing the total number of game balls (2400) that can be obtained based on the 16R jackpot that will occur after.

In the present embodiment, when the V alignment is stopped and displayed, the "4800" plate 6140 is displayed without going through the plate acquisition mission, and after the display of the "2400" plate 6110 is completed, the plate acquisition mission is successful. Therefore, the "2400" plate 6110 is displayed again. However, the plate acquisition mission may be performed before the "4800" plate 6140 is displayed, or when the "2400" plate 6110 is displayed in place of the "4800" plate 6140, the plate acquisition mission is performed. It is also possible to perform a plate acquisition mission again after that, as if the "2400" plate 6110 was acquired.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a hold sequence (when the jackpots are continuous), the display is switched from the "4800" plate 6140 to the "2400" plate 6110 before the jackpot gaming state starts (FIG. 114B (FIG. 114B). d)), it is intended to notify that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed will be the probabilistic gaming state. On the other hand, although detailed description is omitted, even when the jackpots are not continuous, it may be notified that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed will be the probabilistic gaming state depending on the combination of decorative symbols and the display color. Also in this case, the "2400" plate 6110 may be displayed before the start of the jackpot game state. Here, in both the case where these big hits are continuous and the case where the big hits are not continuous, the same effect is performed at the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the same effect data can be used regardless of whether or not the jackpots are continuous, and the capacity required for the effect can be reduced.

<Direction at the time of big hit (7200 plates)>
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a G-aligned jackpot occurs.

FIG. 115 (a) shows how the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the same manner as in FIG. 114A (a). As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the previous special symbol change is lost. As the hold image 6131, the first hold ball image 6131a corresponding to the first hold ball, the second hold ball image 6131b corresponding to the second hold ball, and the third hold corresponding to the third hold ball. The sphere image 6131c and the fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

FIG. 115 (b) shows how the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed after the state shown in FIG. 115 (a). In this example, a freeze effect is performed, the screen is turned off (the screen becomes dark as if it was turned off), and the changing decorative symbol 6130 is small (as if the effect is paused and the decorative symbol 6130 changes). Is displayed (as if it was interrupted). Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. The character "freeze" in the figure is shown for the sake of clarity, and the character is not actually displayed.

In FIG. 115 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 115 (b), "GG" (G alignment) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 on the liquid crystal display device 4, and "7200" is displayed. It shows how the plate 6150 is displayed (see step S1114 and step S1115 in FIG. 112). In FIG. 115 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 115 (c), the display of "GG" (G alignment) ends, while the "4800" plate 6140 replaces the "7200" plate 6150. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1116 in FIG. 112).

The "7200" plate 6150 has the appearance of the number "7200" drawn on the surface of the plate (plate-like member), that is, the number "2400" in the "2400" plate 6110 has been replaced with the number "7200". It has an appearance. The G alignment indicates that the result of this special symbol change is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 115 (d), the jackpot gaming state starts, and thereafter, the same image as in the case where a V-aligned jackpot occurs (see FIGS. 114B and 114C) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. It will be.

As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 115, when "GG" (G alignment) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols 6130, the "7200" plate 6150 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. .. The G alignment is stopped and displayed only when the result of this special symbol change is a 16R probability variation jackpot and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is a 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). It is a decorative symbol combination (a specific symbol combination shown in step S1114 of FIG. 112) to be obtained. The number "7200" included in the "7200" plate 6150 corresponds to the number of game balls (2400) that the player can acquire based on the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to this special symbol change, and the reserved balls. The number of game balls that the player can acquire based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (2400) and the 16R jackpot that will occur after the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the reserved ball are acquired by the player. It shows the total number of game balls that can be played (2400).

In the freeze effect, in the freeze effect, the result of this special symbol change is the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). It is a rendition that can only be performed if. That is, as in the case where the G alignment is stopped and displayed, even when the freeze effect is executed, "the result of this special symbol change is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and it corresponds to at least one reserved ball. The result of the jackpot determination is 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). " However, if the G alignment or freeze effect occurs alone, "The result of this special symbol change is the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation jackpot ( Only when it is not confirmed that "it is a hold ream)" and both G alignment and freeze effect occur, "the result of this special symbol change is a 16R probability change jackpot, and at least one hold ball It may be determined that the result of the corresponding jackpot determination is 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). The freeze effect may be generated whenever the G alignment is displayed, or may be generated even when the G alignment is not displayed. Further, when the freeze effect occurs, the G alignment may be displayed without fail, or the G alignment may not be displayed even if the freeze effect occurs.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the effect mode other than the first special mode (when the determination in step S1101 in FIG. 112 is "No"), the "4800" plate is displayed when the V alignment or the G alignment is stopped and displayed. 6140 or "7200" plate 6150 has been described as being displayed. However, also in the first special mode, the "4800" plate 6140 or the "7200" plate 6150 may be displayed in the same manner. For example, when the determination in step S1102 in FIG. 112 is "No", the same processing as the processing in steps S1111 to S1117 is executed, provided that the V alignment and the G alignment are not stopped and displayed. , May be configured to execute the process of step S1107. It should be noted that the effect of stopping and displaying the V alignment and the effect of displaying the stop of the G alignment can be selected by lottery only in the case of the pending ream. The effect (display of various plates) performed by the process of FIG. 112 may be performed in any effect mode including the normal mode, the time saving mode, and the jackpot mode.

<Granting Yellow 7>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading effect yellow 7 imparting process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the yellow 7 imparting process during the fluctuation performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 118 (a) is a diagram showing a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table. FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of stocks of yellow 7 and the effect color of the logo cover.

<Yellow 7 grant processing during pre-reading production>
In the look-ahead effect middle yellow 7 imparting process shown in FIG. 116, the effect mode determination process is performed by the sub-control circuit 33 when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port in the second special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)). This is the process performed in (see step S205 in FIG. 94). The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting opening by receiving the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers in the second starting opening winning (see step S66 in FIG. 84).

In the look-ahead effect middle yellow 7 granting process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect by performing a lottery based on a random number value (step S1201).

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect (step S1202). If it is determined that the pre-reading effect has not been determined, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is determined, the sub CPU 330 executes the pre-reading effect pattern determination process (step S1203). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the look-ahead effect table and performs a lottery based on a random number value, so that one of the plurality of look-ahead effect patterns (see FIG. 126) is selected as the second look-ahead effect pattern. It is decided as a look-ahead effect pattern related to the starting opening prize.

Although not shown, in the look-ahead effect table, the random value range and the look-ahead effect pattern are defined in association with each other for each variation pattern type (see FIG. 80). Since the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers for the second start opening prize contains information indicating the variation pattern type, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the variation pattern type by receiving the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers for the second start opening winning. be able to.

After executing the process of step S1203, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the yellow 7 effect pattern has been determined as the look-ahead effect pattern related to the second start opening winning this time (step S1204). The yellow 7 effect pattern is an effect pattern in which an effect related to the addition of yellow 7 is performed. If it is determined that the yellow 7 effect pattern has not been determined, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the yellow 7 effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants (step S1205). In this process, the sub CPU 330 can be given in the pre-reading effect related to the second start opening winning this time and the special symbol change performed thereafter by referring to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table (see FIG. 118 (a)). Determine the upper limit of yellow 7.

In the yellow 7 upper limit determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), the yellow 7 upper limit candidate (“missing”, “normal jackpot”, and “probability variable jackpot”) is used for each of the jackpot determination results (“missing”, “normal jackpot”, and “probability variation jackpot”). 1-10 "," 11-20 "," 21-30 "," 31-40 "," 41-50 "," 51-60 "," 61-70 "," 71-80 "," 81- 90 ”,“ 91-100 ”,“ 101-110 ”,“ 111-120 ”,“ 121-130 ”,“ 140 ”,“ 150 ”, and“ 160 ”) It is stipulated.

In the process of step S1205, the sub CPU 330 refers to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table and performs a lottery based on the random number value to determine one yellow 7 upper limit number candidate. When a plurality of numerical values are included in the determined yellow 7 upper limit number candidate, the sub CPU 330 determines one of the plurality of numerical values as the yellow 7 upper limit number. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 330 determines "41 to 50" as the yellow 7 upper limit candidate with a probability of 24/256. In this case, the sub CPU 330 further draws a lottery to select one numerical value from "41 to 50", and determines the selected numerical value as the upper limit number of yellow 7. On the other hand, when only one numerical value is included in the yellow 7 upper limit number candidate, the sub CPU 330 determines the one numerical value as the yellow 7 upper limit number. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination is "probability variation jackpot", the sub CPU 330 determines "150" as a yellow 7 upper limit candidate with a probability of 16/256. In this case, the sub CPU 330 determines "150" as the upper limit number of yellow 7.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, a larger value as the upper limit number of yellow 7 is more likely to be determined than in the case of a normal jackpot or a miss. In particular, "140" and "150" can be determined only in the case of a probabilistic jackpot. Although only one yellow 7 upper limit determination table is shown in FIG. 118 (a), the yellow 7 upper limit may be determined using a yellow 7 upper limit determination table different for each look-ahead effect pattern. .. For example, in the yellow 7 upper limit determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), all the numerical values of 130 or less can be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit, while the numerical values of 131 or more are only "140" and "150". Is shown as being able to be determined as the upper limit of yellow 7. However, it is also possible to provide a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table in which all the numerical values of 131 or more can be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit number, or only a part of the numerical values of 130 or less (for example, 30 to 130). A yellow 7 upper limit determination table may be provided so that only a multiple of 10) can be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit. Further, in the yellow 7 upper limit determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), it is shown that "0" and "160" are not determined as the yellow 7 upper limit, but "0" and "160" are the yellow 7 upper limit. It is also possible to provide a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table that can be determined as a number.

After executing the process of step S1205, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7s to be given in the pre-reading effect this time (step S1206). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines one numerical value equal to or less than the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 as the number of yellow 7 given in the pre-reading effect this time. Specifically, when the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160), the sub CPU 330 has 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160 among 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160. One numerical value belonging to the range of N is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted.

Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 imparted determined in step S1206 (step S1207).

Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the number of yellow 7 granted determined in step S1206 to the value of the yellow 7 counter (step S1208). The value of the yellow 7 number counter indicates the number of yellow 7 given so far, and is stored in the work RAM 332. In the process of step S1208, the sub CPU 330 sets the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 plus the yellow 7 grant number determined in step S1206 as the value of the new yellow 7 number counter. Stored in the work RAM 332.

Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow 7-number counter (step S1209). Although not shown, a logo cover made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) is provided around the liquid crystal display device 4, and the logo cover has a logo or the like corresponding to the model. It is decorated in the shape of the characters shown. A plurality of LEDs are provided on the back side of the logo cover. These LEDs are full-color LEDs and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and can change the effect color of the logo cover.

The effect color of the logo cover is none, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or iridescent (see FIG. 118 (b)). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the effect color of the logo cover corresponds to the number of stocks of yellow 7 (value of the yellow 7 counter). In the process of step S1209, the sub CPU 330 refers to the value of the yellow 7-number counter stored in the work RAM 332, and controls the light emission so that the effect color of the logo cover becomes the color corresponding to the value of the yellow 7-number counter. The effect designation information is transmitted to the circuit 337.

After executing the process of step S1209, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Yellow 7 grant processing during the change>
In the change middle yellow 7 granting process shown in FIG. 117, in the second special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)), after the game ball wins the second starting opening, the special symbol change related to the starting winning starts. Occasionally, it is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94). The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. Although not shown, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub control circuit 33, for example, after the processing of step S117 in FIG. 88.

In the change yellow 7 imparting process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter (see step S1208 in FIG. 116) stored in the work RAM 332 is larger than 0 (step S1221). ).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 0 (that is, when yellow 7 is not given in the look-ahead effect), the sub CPU 330 performs a freeze effect (see FIG. 115) in this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S1222). Although detailed description is omitted, the sub CPU 330 is subjected to the special symbol variation of this time based on the variation pattern type (see FIG. 80) before the yellow 7 addition process in the variation shown in FIG. 117 is started. A corresponding variation effect pattern (see FIG. 125) is determined. In the process of step S1222, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern is an effect pattern related to the freeze effect.

When it is determined that the freeze effect is not performed in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants (step S1223). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit number of yellow 7 that can be given in the present special symbol variation by referring to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table (see FIG. 118 (a)). Since the specific determination method is the same as the method described in step S1205 of FIG. 116, the description thereof is omitted here.

When it is determined in step S1221 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is larger than 0 (that is, when yellow 7 is given in the look-ahead effect), or after the process of step S1223 is executed, the sub CPU 330 uses the current time. The number of yellow 7s to be given in the special symbol variation is determined (step S1224). In this process, the sub CPU 330 is a numerical value equal to or less than the difference between the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1223 or step S1205 of FIG. 116 and the value of the yellow 7 counter (the number of yellow 7 given so far). Is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted in this special symbol change. Specifically, when the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1223 or step S1205 of FIG. 116 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160) and the value of the yellow 7 counter is M, the sub CPU 330 is used. From 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160, one numerical value belonging to the range of 1 to (NM) is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted. In step S1224, even when yellow 7 is given in the look-ahead effect, the number of yellow 7 given in the special symbol variation is determined. However, when yellow 7 is given in the look-ahead effect, in the special symbol change. May not give yellow 7.

Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 imparted determined in step S1224 (step S1225).

Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the yellow 7 granting number determined in step S1224 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1226). In this process, the sub CPU 330 adds the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 to the yellow 7 grant number determined in step S1224 as the value of the new yellow 7 number counter, which is the work RAM 332. To memorize.

Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow 7-number counter (step S1227). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the value of the yellow 7-number counter stored in the work RAM 332, and the effect color of the logo cover is the color corresponding to the value of the yellow 7-number counter (see FIG. 118 (b)). Therefore, the effect designation information is transmitted to the light emission control circuit 337.

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S1228). Since the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 contains information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the result of the jackpot determination by receiving the variation pattern specification command. Can be done. When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is not a big hit, the sub CPU 330 sets "0" to the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 (value of the yellow 7 number counter). (Clear) (step S1229). Then, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the light emission control circuit 337 so as to erase the effect color of the logo cover (turn off the LED) (step S1230). After that, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1222 that the freeze effect will be performed in the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7s to be given in the current special symbol variation by performing a lottery based on the random number value (step S1231). ). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines "160" as the number of yellow 7 assigned in this special symbol variation with a probability of 1/2. Further, when "160" is not determined as the number of yellow 7 to be given in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 further draws a lottery to select one numerical value from "101 to 159". The selected numerical value is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted in this special symbol change.

Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 imparted determined in step S1231 (step S1232).

Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the number of yellow 7 granted determined in step S1231 to the value of the yellow 7 counter (step S1233). In this process, the sub CPU 330 adds the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 to the yellow 7 grant number determined in step S1231 as the value of the new yellow 7 number counter, which is the work RAM 332. To memorize.

Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow 7-number counter (step S1234). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the value of the yellow 7-number counter stored in the work RAM 332, and the effect color of the logo cover is the color corresponding to the value of the yellow 7-number counter (see FIG. 118 (b)). Therefore, the effect designation information is transmitted to the light emission control circuit 337.

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160 (step S1235). When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not 160, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants to "160" (step S1236). When it is determined in step S1235 that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160, or after the process of step S1236 is executed, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118, yellow 7 is given after the game ball wins the second starting opening and before the special symbol change related to the starting winning is stopped. In some cases, when yellow 7 is given, the effect color of the logo cover changes according to the number of yellow 7 given. The effect color changed in this way is inherited even in the big hit game state, and in the present embodiment, the effect color is configured so as not to change during the big hit game state.

Here, as the number of yellows 7 that can be given until the special symbol variation is stopped, a numerical value of 131 or more can be determined only in the case of a probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 118 (a)). When the number of yellow 7 is 131 to 159, the effect color of the logo cover is controlled to gold (see Fig. 118 (b)), and the fact that the effect color is gold means that the probability variation jackpot has been confirmed. Means.

Further, when the number of yellow 7 is 160, the effect color of the logo cover is controlled to rainbow color (see FIG. 118 (b)), and when the freeze effect is performed as described above, the freeze effect is performed. With a probability of 1/2, "160" is determined as the number of yellow 7 grants. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 115, in the freeze effect, the result of this special symbol change is the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation jackpot ( It is an effect that can be executed only when it is a hold ream). In this embodiment, only when the result of this special symbol change is a 16R probability variation jackpot and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is a 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream), Yellow 7 "160" can be determined as the number of grants. Therefore, the fact that the effect color of the logo cover is rainbow is that "the result of this special symbol change is the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation jackpot ( It means that "being a pending ream" has been confirmed.

In the above, it has been explained that one or more yellow 7s are always given regardless of the result of the big hit judgment, but when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, one or more yellow 7s are always given. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, it may be possible that the yellow 7 is not given. In this case, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the effect color of the logo cover is always any color (blue, green, purple, red, gold, or rainbow color). Therefore, the fact that the effect color of the logo cover is colorless means that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. However, it may be possible that the yellow 7 is not given not only when the result of the big hit determination is a loss but also when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. That is, even when the effect color of the logo cover is colorless (when the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 0), there may be a possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

<Special character appearance round>
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the round start processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an attacker winning process performed in the sub-control circuit.

<Processing at the start of the round>
In the round start processing shown in FIG. 119, when each round game (first round to 16th round) starts in the second big hit mode, the sub-control circuit 33 determines the effect mode (see step S205 in FIG. 94). It is a process performed in. The sub control circuit 33 recognizes that the round game is started by receiving a command from the main control circuit 28 corresponding to the start of the round game (process during opening of the large winning opening shown in step S96 of FIG. 87). can do.

As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the second jackpot mode is a jackpot mode that shifts when the jackpot gaming state starts in the second special mode. Further, as will be described later, even when the big hit game state starts in the time saving mode B, the mode may shift to the second big hit mode.

In the round start processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the round game to be started this time is the first round game (step S1241).

When it is determined that the round game to be started this time is the first round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 is 160 (step S1242).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 sets the special character appearance effect data (step S1243). The special character appearance effect data is effect data corresponding to the special character appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The special character appearance effect is an effect in which a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4. When the number of yellows 7 given by the start of the big hit game state is 160 by executing the process of step S1243, a special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit game state. It will be displayed.

After executing the process of step S1243, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1244). The second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the second special mode shifts to the case where an effect (probability change confirmation effect) that can be executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed is performed. do. The effect of displaying the special character on the liquid crystal display device 4 (effect for appearance of the special character) is a probability change confirmation effect. When the second special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode.

After executing the process of step S1244, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1242 that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is not 160, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7-number counter is larger than 130 (step S1245).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is larger than 130, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data for one notification (step S1246). The one-shot notification effect data is the effect data corresponding to the one-shot notification effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The one-shot notification effect includes a special character appearance effect. When the number of yellows 7 given by the start of the big hit game state is 131 or more by executing the process of step S1246, a special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the first round game. It will be displayed.

After executing the process of step S1246, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1247). As described above, the second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied (see step S1244). When the second special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode.

After executing the process of step S1247, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1245 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 130 or less, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants (step S1248). Here, it is assumed that the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 of FIG. 116 or step S1223 of FIG. 117 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160). In this case, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, the sub CPU 330 selects one numerical value belonging to the range of N to 150 from 1 to 130, 140, and 150 by lottery, and is selected. The value is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted. On the other hand, if the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot, the sub CPU 330 selects one numerical value belonging to the range of N to 160 from 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160 by lottery, and is selected. The value is determined as the number of yellow 7 granted. That is, in the case of a normal jackpot, "160" is not determined as the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants, and "160" can be determined as the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants in the case of a probabilistic jackpot. Only. If the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants is 160 before the processing of step S1248 is performed (see step S1236 of FIG. 117), the sub CPU 330 sets the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 grants to "160". To maintain.

If it is determined in step S1241 that the round game to be started this time is not the first round game, or after the process of step S1248 is executed, the sub CPU 330 has the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332. It is determined whether or not it is larger than 0 (step S1249).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is larger than 0, the sub CPU 330 sets the special round effect data (step S1250). The special round effect data is the effect data corresponding to the special round effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. By executing the process of step S1250, the special round effect is performed in the round game to be started this time. As the special round effect, a mode in which a special character appears (see step S1267 in FIG. 120) and a mode in which the special character does not appear (see step S1269 in FIG. 120) are provided. That is, in a special round (a round game in which a special round effect is performed), there is a possibility that a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 and a possibility that the special character does not appear.

After executing the process of step S1250, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1249 that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 0, the sub CPU 330 sets the normal round effect data (step S1251). The normal round effect data is the effect data corresponding to the normal round effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. By executing the process of step S1251, the normal round effect is performed in the round game to be started this time. As the normal round effect, only the mode in which the special character does not appear is provided, and the mode in which the special character appears is not provided. That is, in a normal round (a round game in which an effect for a normal round is performed), there is no possibility that a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4.

After executing the process of step S1251, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Processing when attacker wins>
The attacker winning process shown in FIG. 120 is a sub-control circuit 33 triggered by a game ball entering the attacker (first big winning opening or second big winning opening) in the round game in the second big hit mode. This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94). By receiving the attacker winning command, the sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the game ball has entered the attacker (first big winning opening or second big winning opening). The attacker winning command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub control circuit 33 in the large winning opening passage detection process (see step S43 in FIG. 83).

In the attacker winning process, the sub CPU 330 first determines whether or not the round game currently being played is a special round (step S1261). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special round effect data (see step S1250 in FIG. 119) is set at the start of this round game.

When it is determined that the round game currently being played is a special round, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 is larger than 0 (step S1262).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is larger than 0, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the image corresponding to "yellow 7" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. (Step S1263). The image corresponding to "Yellow 7" is an image in which the number "7" is yellowed, and is the same image as the image corresponding to "Yellow 7 Navi" (see step S1024 in FIG. 105).

After executing the process of step S1263, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (step S1264). Since the jackpot start command (see step S140 in FIG. 89) transmitted from the main control circuit 28 contains information indicating the type of jackpot (symbol command shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B), the jackpot start command is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 330 can recognize the type of jackpot.

When it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the sub CPU 330 executes a special character appearance lottery (step S1265). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special character appearance lottery has been won (step S1266).

When it is determined that the special character appearance lottery has been won, the sub CPU 330 sets the special character appearance effect data (step S1267). The special character appearance effect data is effect data corresponding to the special character appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The special character appearance effect is an effect in which a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4. By executing the process of step S1267, the special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during the special round effect.

After executing the process of step S1267, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1268). As described above, the second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied (see step S1244 of FIG. 119). When the second special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode.

If it is determined in step S1264 that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot, or if it is determined in step S1266 that the special character appearance lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 330 sets the special character non-appearance effect data. (Step S1269). The special character non-appearance effect data is the effect data corresponding to the special character non-appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The effect for non-appearance of the special character is an effect in which the special character does not appear on the liquid crystal display device 4. By executing the process of step S1269, the special character is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (the image corresponding to the failure to appear of the special character is displayed) during the special round effect.

After executing the process of step S1268 or step S1269, the sub CPU 330 subtracts 1 from the value of the yellow 7-number counter (step S1270). In this process, the sub CPU 330 stores the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the yellow 7-number counter stored in the work RAM 332 in the work RAM 332 as a new value of the yellow 7-number counter.

If it is determined in step S1261 that the round game currently being played is not a special round, if it is determined in step S1262 that the value of the yellow 7 counter is 0, or after the process of step S1270 is executed, the sub The CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter is the same as the yellow 7 upper limit number (see step S1248 in FIG. 119) (step S1271).

When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is the same as the yellow 7 upper limit number, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not the same as the yellow 7 upper limit number, the sub CPU 330 executes the yellow 7 addition lottery (step S1272). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the yellow 7 addition lottery has been won (step S1273). If it is determined that the yellow 7 addition lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the yellow 7 addition lottery has been won, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7 additions (step S1274). In this process, the sub CPU 330 sets a numerical value equal to or less than the difference between the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1248 of FIG. 119 and the value of the yellow 7 counter (the number of yellow 7 given so far). 7 Determined as an additional number. Specifically, in the sub CPU 330, when the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1248 of FIG. 119 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160) and the value of the yellow 7 counter is M, 1 to (1 to (N). One numerical value belonging to the range of NM) is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as a yellow 7 addition number.

Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the yellow 7 addition number determined in step S1274 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1275). In this process, the sub CPU 330 uses the value obtained by adding the yellow 7 addition number determined in step S1274 to the value of the yellow 7 counter stored in the work RAM 332 as the value of the new yellow 7 counter, which is the work RAM 332. To memorize.

Next, the sub CPU 330 causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display an image corresponding to the yellow 7 addition number determined in step S1274 and an image corresponding to the value of the yellow 7 number counter after the processing in step S1275. The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1276).

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160 (step S1277). If it is determined that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is not 160, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1278). The second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the second special mode shifts to the case where an effect (probability change confirmation effect) that can be executed only when a probability change jackpot is performed is performed. do. When the value of the yellow 7-number counter reaches 160, the image corresponding to the number "160" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1276), and the numerical image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The production to be made is a probable change confirmation production. When the second special mode transition flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode.

When the value of the yellow 7-number counter reaches 160, the special character appearance effect may or may not be performed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S1277 that the value of the yellow 7-number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 may or may not set the special character appearance effect data. Further, the sub CPU 330 may or may not perform the process of step S1243 in FIG. 119.

After executing the process of step S1278, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

In FIG. 120, yellow 7 is added on condition that the player wins the yellow 7 addition lottery after subtracting the value of the yellow 7 number counter in accordance with the winning of the attacker (first big winning opening or the second big winning opening). Although the addition is performed, the value of the yellow 7 number counter may be subtracted after the addition of yellow 7.

<Yellow 7 granting effect>
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 imparting effect performed when the result of the special symbol variation is a big hit. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 imparting effect performed when the result of the special symbol variation is a loss.

FIGS. 121 (a) and 122 (a) show that the yellow 7 number 6200 is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131. Currently, the yellow 7 number 6200 is an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7s (value of the yellow 7 number counter) given so far. In FIGS. 121 (a) and 122 (a), “0” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200. Further, as in FIG. 114A, as the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the previous special symbol change is lost. Further, as the reserved image 6131, the first reserved ball image 6131a, the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed.

In FIGS. 121 (b) and 122 (b), after the state shown in FIGS. 121 (a) and 122 (a), when the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed, It shows that the yellow 7 number 6200 and the yellow 7 addition number 6201 are currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The yellow 7 granting number 6201 is an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 given in this special symbol variation (see step S1224 in FIG. 117). In FIGS. 121 (b) and 122 (b), “50” is displayed as the number of yellow 7s 6201, indicating that 50 yellows 7 are given in this special symbol variation. Due to the fact that 50 yellows 7 have been given, "50" is currently displayed even if the number of yellows 7 is 6200. As in FIG. 115 (b), the changing decorative symbol 6130 is displayed small, and the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears with the digestion of the first reserved ball, and the second reserved ball image 6131b. , The third reserved ball image 6131c and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed.

In FIGS. 121 (c) and 122 (c), after the state shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 122 (b), the display of the yellow 7 grant number 6201 ends, while the yellow 7 grant number 6201 is replaced. , The changing decorative pattern 6130 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which "1-1-1" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 121 (c). The combination of decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit. On the other hand, FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 122 (c). .. The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“2-3-2”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a loss.

In FIG. 121 (d), “50” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200. That is, the current yellow 7 number 6200 is the same number (50) as the yellow 7 granting number 6201 shown in FIG. 121 (b), and the current yellow 7 number 6200 shown in FIG. 121 (b) is maintained. On the other hand, in FIG. 122 (d), “0” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200, and it is shown that the 50 yellow 7s given in FIG. 122 (b) have disappeared. .. That is, 50 yellow 7 grants have been canceled due to the fact that the result of this special symbol change has been lost (see step S1229 in FIG. 117).

<Direction during the 2nd jackpot mode>
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device during the second jackpot mode.

In the second big hit mode, as long as there is an unconsumed yellow 7, the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time the game ball wins the attacker (first big winning opening or second big winning opening). (See step S1263 in FIG. 120). Although not shown, the yellow 7 image is an image in which the number “7” is yellow, similar to the yellow 7 image 6100 (see FIG. 111 (a)), and falls from above in the liquid crystal display device 4. It is displayed in the following manner.

Then, each time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed (see step S1270 in FIG. 120). As described above, in the present embodiment, one round game ends on condition that 10 game balls have won the attacker (the maximum number of game balls that can be won by the attacker in one round game). Since the number is 10), according to this, a maximum of 10 yellows 7 are consumed in one round game.

FIG. 123 (a) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 121 (d), the big hit game state has started, and “50” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow 7 number 6200. In this example, the jackpot this time is a 16R jackpot, and the remaining number of round games is 16R. In FIG. 123, the characters corresponding to the number of remaining rounds are shown for the sake of easy understanding, and the character image may not be actually displayed.

In FIG. 123 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 123 (a), at the time when the fourth round game starts, "20" is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow 7 number 6200. Shows. After the state shown in FIG. 123 (a), the round game is played three times, so that the remaining number of round games is 13R. Further, since 30 yellows 7 are consumed during the three round games, the number of yellows 7 6200 is currently reduced by 30 from the number (50) shown in FIG. 123 (a).

In FIG. 123 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), at the time when the sixth round game starts, “0” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow 7 number 6200. Shows. After the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), the round game is played twice, so that the remaining number of round games is 11R. Further, since 20 yellows 7 are consumed during the two round games, the number of yellows 7 6200 is currently reduced by 20 from the number (20) shown in FIG. 123 (b).

As described above, in the first to fifth round games, the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time the game ball wins the attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening). Then, every time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed, and if it is a probabilistic big hit, a lottery for the appearance of a special character is performed (see step S1265 in FIG. 120). .. If you win the lottery for the appearance of special characters, special characters will appear. The appearance of a special character is a kind of effect (probability change definite effect) that can be executed only when a probability change jackpot occurs. That is, in the first to fifth round games, there is a possibility that the player can be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been achieved through the appearance of the special character.

On the other hand, the 50 yellows 7 granted by the start of the jackpot game state are all consumed in the 1st to 5th round games, and are not consumed at the time when the 6th round game starts. The number (the value of the yellow 7-number counter) is 0. In this example, it is assumed that the yellow 7 is not added in the first to fifth round games, and the yellow 7 is not added in the sixth to tenth round games thereafter. In the 6th to 10th round games, the unused yellow 7 number (value of the yellow 7 number counter) continues to be 0, so that the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during that time. It never happens, and no special characters appear.

After that, it is assumed that 10 yellows 7 are added in the 11th round game (see step S1275 in FIG. 120). FIG. 123 (d) shows that "10" is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow 7 number 6200 at the time when the twelfth round game starts. After the state shown in FIG. 123 (c), the round game is played 6 times, so that the remaining number of round games is 5R. Further, due to the addition of 10 yellows 7, the number of yellows 7 6200 is currently increased by 10 from the number (0) shown in FIG. 123 (c).

As a result, in the twelfth round game, the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time the game ball wins the attacker (first prize opening or second prize opening). Then, every time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed, and if it is a probabilistic big hit, a lottery for the appearance of a special character is performed (see step S1265 in FIG. 120). .. As a result, in the 12th round game, as in the 1st to 5th round games, there is a possibility that the player can be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been achieved through the appearance of the special character. ..

After the state shown in FIG. 123 (d), it is assumed that the big hit game state is completed without adding the yellow 7. FIG. 123 (e) shows how "0" is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow 7 number 6200 at the time when the big hit game state ends. The 10 yellow 7s added in the 11th round game are all consumed in the 12th round game, and at the end of the jackpot game state, the unconsumed yellow 7s (value of the yellow 7 counter) is , 0. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of yellows 7 that can be given is 160 (see step S1248 in FIG. 119), so that the number of yellows 7 consumed in one round game is 10. Then, at the time when the 16R jackpot ends, the unused yellow 7 number (value of the yellow 7 number counter) is always 0. If a situation occurs in which an unconsumed yellow 7 number (value of the yellow 7 number counter) remains, the value of the yellow 7 number counter may be cleared at the end of the big hit game state. However, the value of the yellow 7-number counter may be carried over after the end of the jackpot game state.

<Direction at the time of big hit (freeze production)>
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the freeze effect occurs in the second special mode.

FIG. 124 (a) shows how the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the same manner as in FIG. 115 (a). As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the previous special symbol change is lost. As the hold image 6131, the first hold ball image 6131a corresponding to the first hold ball, the second hold ball image 6131b corresponding to the second hold ball, and the third hold corresponding to the third hold ball. The sphere image 6131c and the fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

FIG. 124 (b) shows how the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed after the state shown in FIG. 124 (a). In this example, a freeze effect is performed, the screen is turned off, and the changing decorative symbol 6130 is displayed small. Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. The character "freeze" in the figure is shown for the sake of clarity, and the character is not actually displayed.

In FIG. 124 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 124 (b), at the position corresponding to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (near the substantially center of the opening 1h), the first accessory device 4000 (see FIG. 1). ), The lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are shown to be in a state of being slid until they are close to each other (see FIG. 70). As described in the first embodiment, in this state, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are directed forward. In the present embodiment, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 is decorated with the characters "GAME", and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decoration body 4410 is "BONUS". The decoration corresponds to the letters. In FIG. 124 (c), the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 due to the proximity of the lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410. The appearance is formed by integrating the decoration applied to the second surface 4412 of the above. As a result, the player can visually recognize the English word "BONUS GAME" and can grasp that the big hit game state starts.

In FIG. 124 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 124 (c), the first accessory device 4000 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 1), and at present, the yellow 7 number 6200 and the yellow 7 addition number 6201 are displayed on the liquid crystal display. The state displayed on the apparatus 4 is shown. “160” is displayed as the number of yellow 7s to be given 6201, indicating that 160 yellows 7s have been given in this special symbol variation (see step S1231 in FIG. 117). Due to the fact that 160 yellows 7 have been added, "160" is currently displayed even if the number of yellows 7 is 6200. Currently, "160" is displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200 and "160" is displayed as the yellow 7 grant number 6201. It is a kind of. As a result, the player is notified that the probability change jackpot has been achieved.

In FIG. 124 (e), after the state shown in FIG. 124 (d), the display of the yellow 7 granting number 6201 ends, while the changing decorative symbol 6130 replaces the yellow 7 granting number 6201 in the liquid crystal display device 4. It shows how it is displayed in. FIG. 124 (f) shows a state in which "1-1-1" is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 124 (e). The combination of decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit.

As a result, the big hit game state starts, and the special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit game state (see step S1243 in FIG. 119). In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the game state is changed to the big hit game state through the freeze effect as shown in FIG. 124, the one-shot notification effect (see step S1246 in FIG. 119) is performed, or the special character appears. If a special character has already appeared, such as when a lottery (see step S1265 in FIG. 120) is won, the attacker winning process (see FIG. 120) may not be performed.

<Variable staging pattern (for the second special mode)>
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode of the variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern shown in FIG. 125 is a pattern of various effects that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the second special mode.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "1" to "7", the effect of inciting the release of the character hold (the appearance of the character corresponding to the hold ball) is performed. The character hold may occur in this special symbol change or before the special symbol change.

Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "1", the release of the character hold is encouraged as the first step, and the effect of failing to release the character hold is performed in the first step. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "2", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. In the step, a production that fails to release the character hold is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "3", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. After the step is successful, the release of the character hold is further promoted as the third step, and the effect of failing to release the character hold is performed in the third step.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "4", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. After the step is successful, the release of the character hold is further fueled as the third step, and after the success of the third step, the completion of the character is fueled by the appearing character, and the completion of the character (FIG. 124 (c). ) Is successful, and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "5", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. After the step is successful, the release of the character hold is further fueled as the third step, and after the success of the third step, the completion of the character is fueled by the appearing character, and the character is completed (FIG. 124 (c). ) Will fail.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "6", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. After the step is successful, the release of the character hold is further fueled as the third step, and after the success of the third step, the completion of the character is fueled by the appearing character, and the completion of the character (FIG. 124 (c). ) Fails once, but after that, the character is successfully completed (see FIG. 124 (c)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "7", the release of the character hold is fanned as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is further fanned as the second step. After the step is successful, the release of the character hold is further fueled as the third step, and after the success of the third step, the completion of the character is fueled by the appearing character, and the completion of the character (FIG. 124 (c). ) Fails, but the appearance of a specific character is fueled, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "4" and "6" are effects that can occur when the special symbol change related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number "7" is an effect that can occur when the special symbol change related to the first start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. If the button effect during the effect is successful, the mode shifts to the jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character. The jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character is a jackpot mode different from the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "8" to "12", an effect of inciting the appearance of a predetermined character (first predetermined character, second predetermined character, or third predetermined character) is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "8", the appearance of the predetermined character is agitated, and the effect of failing to appear of the predetermined character is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "9", the appearance of the predetermined character is agitated, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the character is agitated and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. It is displayed, the character is successfully completed (see FIG. 124 (c)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "10", the appearance of the predetermined character is agitated, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the character is agitated and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. It is displayed, and an effect of failing to complete the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)) is performed.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "11", the appearance of the predetermined character is agitated, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the character is agitated and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. It is displayed and the completion of the character (see FIG. 124 (c)) fails once, but after that, the character is successfully completed (see FIG. 124 (c)) and the yellow 7 is given. Will be. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "12", the appearance of the predetermined character is agitated, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the character is agitated and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. Although it is displayed and the completion of the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)) fails, the appearance of the specific character is agitated, and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed again.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "9" and "11" are effects that can occur when the special symbol change related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number "12" is an effect that can occur when the special symbol change related to the first start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. If the button effect during the effect is successful, the mode shifts to the jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character. The jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character is a jackpot mode different from the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "13" to "17", the effect of inciting the entry into the predetermined zone is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "13", the entry into the predetermined zone is encouraged as the first step, and the effect of failing to enter the predetermined zone is performed in the first step. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "14", the entry into the predetermined zone is fanned as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is further fueled as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is fueled in the second step. The production that fails is performed.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "15", the entry into the predetermined zone is fanned as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is further fueled as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is fueled in the second step. After succeeding in (two character symbols are aligned to reach), the three character symbols are fanned, the three character symbols are successfully aligned, and the character is completed (Fig. 124 (c)). (See), the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "16", the entry into the predetermined zone is fanned as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is further fueled as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is fueled in the second step. After success (two character symbols are aligned to reach the reach), the three character symbols are fanned, and the production of failing to complete the three character symbols is performed.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "17", the entry into the predetermined zone is fanned as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is further fueled as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is fueled in the second step. After succeeding (two character symbols became a reach), the three character symbols were fanned, and the three character symbols failed once, but after that, the three character symbols succeeded. At the same time, the character is completed (see FIG. 124 (c)), and the effect of adding yellow 7 is performed.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "15" and "17" are effects that can occur when the special symbol change related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. If the symbol corresponding to the special character is tempted, the big hit is confirmed. When the symbols corresponding to the other characters are tempered, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the type of the character.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "18" to "19", the effect of inciting the appearance of the button is performed. Whenever a button appears, yellow 7 is given. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "18", the appearance of the button is agitated, and the effect of failing to appear of the button is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "19", the appearance of the button is agitated, the appearance of the button is successful, and after the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, (presence or absence of button operation). Regardless of), the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number "19" is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "20", after the freeze effect (see FIGS. 124 (b) and 128 (c)) is performed, the accessory is completed (FIG. 124 (c) and 128 (FIG. 128). d)), the effect of adding yellow 7 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number "20" is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "20" can be selected even in the time saving mode B.

<Look-ahead effect pattern (for the second special mode)>
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode of the look-ahead effect pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 126 is a pattern of various look-ahead effects performed in the second special mode.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "106", an effect of generating a crack as if it was torn by a nail is performed on the liquid crystal display device 4. If the screen cracks and Yellow 7 pops out from the crack as a starting point, it is successful. The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "106" are effects that can occur when the special symbol change related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode.

Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "101", the effect that the yellow 7 fails to pop out in the first special symbol change is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "102", the yellow 7 is successfully popped out in the first special symbol variation, and the effect to which the yellow 7 is given is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "103", no result is obtained for the yellow 7 popping out in the first special symbol variation, and the effect that the yellow 7 pops out fails in the second special symbol variation is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "104", no result was obtained for the yellow 7 popping out in the first special symbol variation, and the yellow 7 was successfully popped out in the second special symbol variation, and the yellow 7 was given. The production is performed.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "105", no result is obtained for the yellow 7 pop-out in the first special symbol change, and no result is obtained for the yellow 7 pop-out in the second special symbol change, and the third time. In the special symbol change of, the effect that Yellow 7 fails to pop out is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "106", no result was obtained for the yellow 7 pop-out in the first special symbol change, and no result was obtained for the yellow 7 pop-out in the second special symbol change, and the third time. In the special symbol change of, the yellow 7 is successfully popped out, and the effect of giving the yellow 7 is performed.

As described above, in FIGS. 125 and 126, an example of the effect pattern has been described. In the present embodiment, for example, a specific hold effect pattern, a specific item effect pattern, a flashback effect pattern, a cut-in effect pattern, and other effect patterns are provided.

The specific hold effect pattern is an effect pattern that occurs when a special symbol change is performed for a specific hold (a hold ball on which a specific image is displayed). In the specific hold effect pattern, the effect of adding yellow 7 is performed when the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific hold starts. In the specific item effect pattern, an effect in which yellow 7 is given when a specific item appears is performed. The lottery for determining whether or not a specific item appears is performed separately from the lottery for selecting a variable effect pattern or a look-ahead effect pattern, and the appearance of a specific item is when a special symbol change is performed. Not limited to this, it may occur at various timings in the second special mode.

In the flashback effect pattern, an effect is performed in which a character flashback occurs at the start of a special symbol change. As a result, the expectation that the character appearing in the flashback will be produced is increased. The character may change across the look-ahead effect. In the cut-in effect pattern, an effect that a specific character cuts in is performed. The more the effect is generated, the higher the expectation of the effect that a specific character appears after the reach loss. The effect may occur as a look-ahead effect.

<Time saving mode B medium processing>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a process during the time saving mode B performed in the sub-control circuit.

In the time saving mode B middle processing shown in FIG. 127, in the time saving mode B (see FIG. 103 (a)), after the game ball wins the first starting port or the second starting opening, the special symbol change related to the starting winning is caused. This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub-control circuit 33 when the effect is finished (when the effect based on the variable effect pattern (see FIG. 125) is completed).

As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the time saving mode B may shift via the time saving mode A, or may directly shift from the jackpot mode to the time saving mode B. be. In the present embodiment, when both the transition condition to the first special mode and the transition condition to the second special mode are not satisfied during the jackpot mode (when the probability change confirmation effect is not performed), the time reduction mode A and the time reduction are performed. It is decided by lottery which of the mode B and the effect mode to shift to. For example, in the second big hit mode, a special character appearance effect (step S1267 in FIG. 120), which is a kind of probability change confirmation effect, and other probability change confirmation effects (for example, "160" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the current yellow 7 number. If the effect of displaying) is not performed, there is a possibility of shifting to the time saving mode B after the end of the second big hit mode.

In the process during the time saving mode B, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S1281). Since the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 contains information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the result of the jackpot determination by receiving the variation pattern specification command. Can be done.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect is performed in the special symbol variation this time (step S1282). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the effect pattern related to the freeze effect (see the effect number “20” shown in FIG. 125) is determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time.

When it is determined that the freeze effect has been performed in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second jackpot mode (step S1283). On the other hand, when it is determined that the freeze effect is not performed in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect mode to a jackpot mode other than the second jackpot mode (for example, the first jackpot mode or the jackpot mode corresponding to a specific character). ) (Step S1284). In the process of step S1283 or step S1284, the sub CPU 330 updates the information stored in the effect mode flag storage area from the information corresponding to the time saving mode B to the information corresponding to the jackpot mode of the migration destination. After executing the process of step S1283 or step S1284, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1281 that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the current special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the point acquisition effect has been performed in the current special symbol variation (step S1285). .. In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the effect pattern related to the point acquisition effect is determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. The effect pattern related to the point acquisition effect is a variable effect pattern that can be selected in the time saving mode B (see FIG. 129), and when the point acquisition effect is performed, the second special mode transition point is given. There is a possibility. The number of points for transition to the second special mode to be given is determined by lottery from 1 to 1000.

If it is determined that the point acquisition effect has not been performed in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the point acquisition effect has been performed in the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of points for transition to the second special mode (points awarded) given in the current point acquisition effect. It is added to the value of the point number counter for the second special mode transition (step S1286). The value of the second special mode transition point counter indicates the number of the second special mode transition points given so far, is stored in the work RAM 332, and is cleared at the end of the time saving mode B. In the process of step S1286, the sub CPU 330 adds a value obtained by adding the number of points given in the current point acquisition effect to the value of the second special mode transition point number counter stored in the work RAM 332, which is a new second. It is stored in the work RAM 332 as the value of the point number counter for special mode transition.

Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the second special mode transition point number counter is 1000 (step S1287). When it is determined that the value of the second special mode transition point number counter is not 1000, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the point number counter for shifting to the second special mode is 1000, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode (step S1288). In this process, the sub CPU 330 updates the information stored in the effect mode flag storage area from the information corresponding to the time saving mode B to the information corresponding to the second special mode. After executing the process of step S1288, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Direction at the time of big hit (freeze production)>
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the freeze effect occurs in the time saving mode B.

FIG. 128A shows how the point display meter 6210 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131. The point display meter 6210 is an image corresponding to a meter showing the number of points for transition to the second special mode (value of the counter for the number of points for transition to the second special mode) given so far. In the point display meter 6210, the part painted in black corresponds to the number of points for transition to the second special mode given so far. The decorative symbol 6130 is displayed small, and the symbol combination of "2-3-2" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the previous special symbol change is lost. As the hold image 6131, the first hold ball image 6131a corresponding to the first hold ball, the second hold ball image 6131b corresponding to the second hold ball, and the third hold corresponding to the third hold ball. The sphere image 6131c and the fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

In FIG. 128 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of points awarded 6211 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed. It shows how it is doing. The number of points given 6211 is an image corresponding to the number of points for transition to the second special mode given in this special symbol change. In FIG. 128 (b), “23” is displayed as the number of points awarded 6211, indicating that 23 points for transitioning to the second special mode have been awarded in the current special symbol variation. Due to the fact that the points for transitioning to the second special mode are given, the number of points for transitioning to the second special mode (black portion) indicated by the point display meter 6210 is larger than that in FIG. 128 (a). With the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed.

FIG. 128 (c) shows how the freeze effect is performed after the state shown in FIG. 128 (b). Similar to FIG. 124 (b), in this state, the screen is turned off and the changing decorative symbol 6130 is displayed small. The character "freeze" in the figure is shown for the sake of clarity, and the character is not actually displayed. In FIG. 128 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), the first accessory device 4000 (see FIG. 1) is located at a position corresponding to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (near substantially the center of the opening 1h). ), The lower rotating decoration body 4210 and the upper rotating decoration body 4410 are shown to be in a state of being slid until they are close to each other (see FIG. 70). Similar to FIG. 124 (c), in this state, the player can visually recognize the English word "BONUS GAME" and can grasp that the big hit game state starts.

In FIG. 128 (e), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first accessory device 4000 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 1), and at present, the yellow 7 number 6200 and the yellow 7 addition number 6201 are displayed on the liquid crystal display. The state displayed on the apparatus 4 is shown. "160" is displayed as the number of yellow 7s to be given 6201, indicating that 160 yellows 7s have been given in this special symbol variation. Due to the fact that 160 yellows 7 have been added, "160" is currently displayed even if the number of yellows 7 is 6200. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the freeze effect occurs in the time saving mode B, the yellow 7 is added as in the case where the freeze effect occurs in the second special mode (see FIG. 124) (see FIG. 124). Although not shown, the same processing as in steps S1231 to S1236 of FIG. 117 is performed).

In the present embodiment, the yellow 7 is given in the time saving mode B only when the freeze effect occurs, and is not limited to the case where the freeze effect occurs, and any condition is given during the time saving mode B. When is satisfied, yellow 7 may be given. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 128, when yellow 7 is displayed, the point display meter 6210 disappears, but when yellow 7 is given, the point display meter 6210 is set to MAX (full tank). It may be displayed as it is, or the point display meter 6210 may be displayed as it is.

FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 128 (e). The combination of decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit. As a result, the big hit game state starts, the effect mode becomes the second big hit mode (see step S1283 in FIG. 127), and the special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit game state. (See step S1243 in FIG. 119). As described above, in the freeze effect, the result of this special symbol change is the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation jackpot (holding ream). It is a rendition that can only be performed if. In the example shown in FIG. 128, the case where 160 yellows 7 are given is described, but when the number of given yellows 7 is less than 160, a freeze effect occurs in the second special mode. As in the case of the above, the player is notified that the probability change jackpot has been achieved through the one-shot notification effect (see step S1246 in FIG. 119) and the special character appearance lottery (see step S1265 in FIG. 120). Will be.

<Production pattern (for time saving mode B)>
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining a specific aspect of the effect pattern. The staging pattern shown in FIG. 129 is a pattern of various staging that can occur in the time saving mode B.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "201" to "204", the hold is opened and the effect of acquiring the item coming out of the hold is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "201", an effect that succeeds in acquiring an item is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "202", the effect of successfully acquiring the item is performed after the acquisition of the item is fanned for a short time. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "203", the acquisition of the item is fanned for a short time, and after the acquisition of the item is fanned for a long time, the effect of succeeding in acquiring the item is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number "204", the acquisition of the item is fanned for a short time, and after the acquisition of the item is fanned for a long time, a predetermined pattern is displayed, and the production numbers "206" to "209" are displayed. The production that develops into the production pattern corresponding to "" is performed.

There are multiple types of items, and among the multiple types of items, items for acquiring points for transitioning to the second special mode (items for acquiring points) and production numbers "210" to "211" Items for generating the corresponding effect, items for increasing the probability of occurrence of the effect, and the like are included. Which of the multiple types of items will be acquired is determined in advance by lottery. When an item for earning points is acquired, a numerical value from 1 to 1000 is determined by lottery as the number of points for transitioning to the second special mode to be granted.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "205" to "209", an effect of inciting the character to operate in a predetermined mode (pry open the shutter) is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "205", the appearance of the name (title) of the effect is aroused, and the effect of failing to appear in the title is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "206", the appearance of the title is agitated, and after the title appears, the shutter is agitated to pry open, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. Along with the success of prying open, the accessory is completed (see FIG. 128 (d)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "207", the appearance of the title is agitated, and after the title appears, the shutter is agitated to pry open, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. A production that fails to pry open is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "208", the appearance of the title is agitated, and after the title appears, the shutter is agitated to pry open, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. Although it fails to pry open once, after that, the character is completed (see FIG. 128 (d)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "209", the appearance of the title is agitated, and after the title appears, the shutter is agitated to pry open, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. Although it fails to pry open, the appearance of a specific character is fueled, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed.

The effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "205" to "209" is an effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation. Among the effects related to these effect patterns, the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "206" and "208" can occur when the special symbol change related to the second start opening winning is performed in the time saving mode B. Is. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the effect pattern is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number "209" is an effect that can occur when the special symbol change related to the first start opening winning is performed in the time saving mode B. If the button effect during the effect is successful, the mode shifts to the jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "210" to "211", an effect in which a specific item appears is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "210", after the specific item appears, the effect corresponding to the second special mode appears. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "210" is selected, the mode shifts to the second special mode. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "211", after the specific item appears, the character is completed during the next special symbol change (see FIG. 128 (d)), and the effect is given yellow 7. Will be done. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "211" is selected, the mode shifts to the second big hit mode. In this way, when yellow 7 is given (displayed), it may shift to the second big hit mode or the second special mode. The lottery for determining whether or not a specific item appears is performed separately from the lottery for selecting a variable effect pattern or a look-ahead effect pattern, and the appearance of a specific item is accompanied by a special symbol change. It may occur at various timings in the time saving mode B, not only when it is used.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "212" to "213", when the number of special symbol changes performed after the jackpot game state ends reaches a specific number of times (95 times) (final in the time saving mode B). (In the special symbol change of), the production that encourages the transition to the second special mode is performed. Specifically, the countdown is started from the time when the 92nd special symbol change is completed after the jackpot game state is completed, and when the 92nd special symbol change is completed, the remaining number of times is 3 times. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, and when the 93rd special symbol change is completed, the remaining number of times is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, and when the 94th special symbol change is completed, the remaining number is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 4 displays that the number of times is one, and when the 95th special symbol variation is completed, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays that the remaining number of times is 0.

Then, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "212", it is shown that the door is closed after the 95th special symbol change is completed, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. 2 When the special mode transition point reaches 1000 points (the point display meter 6210 shown in FIG. 128 becomes full), a special character appears by prying open the door. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "212" is selected, the mode shifts to the second special mode. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "213", it is shown that the door is closed after the 95th special symbol change is completed, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, but the special character is displayed. Fails to pry open the door, and the second special mode transition point does not reach 1000 points (for example, the point display meter 6210 reaches 999 points, which encourages 1000 points to be reached, but fails to reach 1000 points. ) The production is performed. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "213" is selected, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

<Processing when winning a prize in Kroon>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a crune winning process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the processing during the time saving mode B (1) performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the processing during the time saving mode B (2) performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the processing in the normal mode performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing a probability change suggestion sound effect determination table. FIG. 134 (b) is a diagram showing a probability change suggestion lamp effect determination table. FIG. 134 (c) is a diagram showing a jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table.

The crune winning process shown in FIG. 130 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) when the game ball enters the general winning opening 1013. By receiving the crune winning command, the sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the game ball has entered the croon (general winning opening 1013). The crune winning command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub control circuit 33 in the general winning opening passage detection process (see step S42 in FIG. 83).

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a crune, which is a dish-shaped member, is provided on the game board 1. The crune is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view, and is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper side surface thereof. The upper surface of the crune is formed in a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the center thereof. A hole is formed in the central portion of the upper side surface, and the hole constitutes the general winning opening 1013. Note that, unlike FIG. 1, the general winning opening 1013 may be provided below the position where the starting winning opening 1009 is arranged.

In the croon winning process, the sub CPU 330 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the time saving mode B (see FIG. 103 (a)) (step S1301). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 332, and the sub CPU 330 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is the time saving mode B, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the time saving mode B (1) (step S1302). In the present embodiment, the time saving mode B (1) and the time saving mode B (2) are provided as the time saving mode B.

Specifically, the time saving mode B (1) is the time saving mode B for shifting from the second big hit mode, and the time saving mode B (2) is the time saving mode B for shifting from the big hit mode other than the second big hit mode. That is, when the effect mode shifts from the second big hit mode to the time saving mode B, the time saving mode B is the time saving mode B (1), and the big hit mode other than the second big hit mode (for example, the first big hit mode). When the effect mode shifts from to the time saving mode B, the time saving mode B is the time saving mode B (2). On the contrary, when the effect mode shifts from the first big hit mode to the time saving mode B, the time saving mode B is the time saving mode B (1), and the big hit mode other than the first big hit mode (for example). , The second big hit mode) to the time saving mode B, the time saving mode B may be the time saving mode B (2).

When it is determined in step S1302 that the current effect mode is the time saving mode B (1), the sub CPU 330 executes the process during the time saving mode B (1) (step S1303). The processing during the time saving mode B (1) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the time saving mode B (1), the sub CPU 330 executes the process during the time saving mode B (2) (step S1304). The processing during the time saving mode B (2) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

When it is determined in step S1301 that the current effect mode is not the time saving mode B, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 103A) (step S1305).

When it is determined that the current effect mode is the normal mode, the sub CPU 330 executes the process during the normal mode (step S1306). The processing during the normal mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

After executing the process of step S1303, step S1304, or step S1306, or when it is determined in step S1305 that the current effect mode is not the normal mode, the sub-CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Time saving mode B (1) Medium processing>
The process in the time saving mode B (1) shown in FIG. 131 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1303 of FIG. 130.

In the time saving mode B (1) middle processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (currently, the special symbol is changing) (step S1321). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started. The sub CPU 330 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. Further, since the fluctuation pattern designation command includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern type (see FIG. 80), the sub CPU 330 recognizes the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern by receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. be able to.

If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the reach effect pattern has been determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change this time (step S1322). In the reach effect pattern, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode (of the decorative symbol located on the left side, the decorative symbol located on the right side, and the decorative symbol located in the center, two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol. This is an effect pattern in which the effect is performed (the remaining one decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner). Although not shown, when the sub CPU 330 receives the variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 330 refers to the variation effect table and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one variation effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation. .. In the variation effect table, a random value range is defined for each of the plurality of variation effect patterns. The plurality of variable effect patterns include a plurality of types of reach effect patterns. In the process of step S1322, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not any one of the plurality of types of reach effect patterns is determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation.

When it is determined that the reach effect pattern has not been determined, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the predetermined effect timing is reached (step S1323). The predetermined effect timing is the timing at which the decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode. That is, in the process of step S1323, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the decorative symbol is already displayed in the reach mode. Here, the time (reach timing) from the start of the special symbol variation (variation display of the decorative symbol) until the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode differs depending on the type of the reach effect pattern. The program ROM 331 stores the reach timing for each reach effect pattern. In the process of step S1323, the sub CPU 330 refers to the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern among the reach timings stored in the program ROM 331, so that the reach timing is set after the special symbol change is started. Determine if it has been reached.

When it is determined that the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern has not been reached, the sub CPU 330 executes the probability change suggestion effect determination process (step S1324). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the content of the probabilistic suggestion sound effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value with reference to the probabilistic suggestion sound effect determination table (see FIG. 134 (a)), and also determines the content of the probabilistic suggestion sound effect. The content of the probability change suggestion lamp effect is determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value with reference to the lamp effect determination table (see FIG. 134 (b)).

In the probability change suggestion sound effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (a), the contents of the probability change suggestion sound effect (“no effect” and “probability change confirmed sound” for each of the “probability change game state” and the “non-probability change game state”. The lottery value corresponding to "Direction") is specified. The “probability change definite sound effect” is, for example, a sound output from a speaker when a medal is paid out in a predetermined pachislot machine. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, "no effect" is determined with a probability of 240/256, and "probability change definite sound effect" is determined with a probability of 16/256. Is determined. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state, "no effect" is always determined.

In the probability change suggestion lamp effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (b), the contents of the probability change suggestion lamp effect (“no effect” and “first lamp” for each of the “probability change game state” and the “non-probability change game state”. The lottery value corresponding to the "staging" and the "second lamp staging") is defined. The "first lamp effect" is an effect in which the lamp lights up (for example, blinks a predetermined number of times) in the first aspect. The "second lamp effect" is an effect in which the lamp is turned on in the second mode (for example, blinks more times than a predetermined number of times). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the current gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state, "no effect" is determined with a probability of 224/256, and "first lamp effect" is determined with a probability of 16/256. Is determined, and the "second lamp effect" is determined with a probability of 16/256. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state, "no effect" is determined with a probability of 224/256, and "first lamp effect" is determined with a probability of 32/256. , "Second lamp production" is never decided.

After executing the process of step S1324, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data corresponding to the effect content determined in step S1324 (step S1325). That is, when the "probability change definite sound effect" is determined as the probability change suggestion sound effect, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data corresponding to the probability change definite sound effect, and sets the effect data corresponding to the probability change definite sound effect, and sets the "first lamp effect" or the "first lamp effect" as the probability change suggestion lamp effect. When "2 lamp effect" is determined, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data corresponding to the determined lamp effect. When "no effect" is determined for both the probability change suggestion sound effect and the probability change suggestion lamp effect, the sub CPU 330 does not set the effect data. The effect data corresponding to each effect content is stored in the program ROM 331.

When both the probabilistic change definite sound effect and the lamp effect (first lamp effect or the second lamp effect) are generated by executing the process of step S1325, the probabilistic change definite sound effect and the lamp effect (first lamp effect or the first lamp effect) are generated. There are variations such as when only one of the two lamp effects is generated, and when neither the sound effect nor the lamp effect is generated. The probabilistic fixed sound effect and the second lamp effect are effects that can occur only when the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, and when at least one of these effects is performed, the probabilistic gaming state is used. It is confirmed that there is.

After executing the process of step S1325, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1323 that the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern has been reached, the sub CPU 330 executes the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination process (step S1326). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the content of the jackpot reliability suggestion effect by performing a lottery based on a random number value with reference to the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table (see FIG. 134 (c)).

In the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (c), the contents of the jackpot reliability suggestion effect (“first sound effect” and “second sound effect” for each of “big hit” and “missing”. , "3rd sound production", "4th sound production", "5th sound production", "6th sound production", "7th sound production", and "8th sound production") The value is specified. The "first sound effect" to the "eighth sound effect" are effects in which sound is output from the speaker in different modes.

After executing the process of step S1326, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data corresponding to the effect content determined in step S1326 (step S1327). The effect data corresponding to each effect content is stored in the program ROM 331. By executing the process of step S1327, any one of "first sound effect" to "eighth sound effect" is performed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (c), when the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the "first sound effect" to the "eighth sound effect" have the same probability ( 8192/65536) can be selected. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is out of order, "1st sound production", "2nd sound production", "3rd sound production", "4th sound production", " The probability of being selected in the order of "fifth sound effect", "sixth sound effect", "seventh sound effect", and "eighth sound effect" is low. As a result, "1st sound production", "2nd sound production", "3rd sound production", "4th sound production", "5th sound production", "6th sound production", "7th sound production" , And the order of "8th sound production", the jackpot reliability in the case where the production is performed is higher.

The jackpot reliability is the probability that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot when one effect is performed. According to FIG. 134 (c), it can be expected that the case where the second sound effect is performed is a big hit than the case where the first sound effect is performed, and it is higher than the case where the second sound effect is performed. It can be expected that the case where the 3rd sound production is performed is a big hit, and the case where the 4th sound production is performed is expected to be a big hit than the case where the 3rd sound production is performed. It can be expected that the case where the 5th sound production is performed is a big hit than the case where the 4th sound production is performed, and the 6th sound production is performed compared to the case where the 5th sound production is performed. It can be expected that the case where it is broken is a big hit, and it can be expected that the case where the 7th sound production is performed is a big hit than the case where the 6th sound production is performed, and the 7th sound production is It can be expected that the case where the eighth sound production is performed is a big hit than the case where it is performed. In particular, the eighth sound effect is an effect that can occur only when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and when the eighth sound effect is performed, it is determined that the big hit. The eighth sound effect may be the same effect as the probabilistic definite sound effect (see FIG. 134 (a)), or may be a different effect.

After executing the process of step S1327, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Time saving mode B (2) Medium processing>
The process in the time saving mode B (2) shown in FIG. 132 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1304 of FIG. 130.

In the time saving mode B (2) middle processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S1341). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started, as in step S1321 of FIG. 131.

If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol change is in progress, the sub CPU 330 has a predetermined number of times (50 times) or less of the special symbol change (including the current special symbol change) performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1342). Since the variation pattern specification command includes information indicating the value of the time-saving state variation counter (see FIG. 90), the sub CPU 330 ends the jackpot gaming state by receiving the variation pattern specification command. It is possible to recognize the number of special symbol changes made from.

When it is determined that the number of special symbol changes performed after the jackpot game state is completed is the predetermined number of times (50 times) or less, the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of steps S1343 and S1344. Since the processing of step S1343 and step S1344 is the same processing as the processing of step S1324 and step S1325 of FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special symbol changes performed after the jackpot gaming state ends is greater than the predetermined number of times (50 times), the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of steps S1345 and S1346. Since the processes of steps S1345 and S1346 are the same as the processes of steps S1326 and S1327 of FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here.

After executing the process of step S1344 or step S1346, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing during normal mode>
The process in the normal mode shown in FIG. 133 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1306 of FIG. 131.

In the normal mode processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S1361). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started, as in step S1321 of FIG. 131.

If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the normal mode (1) (step S1362). In the present embodiment, the normal mode (1) and the normal mode (2) are provided as the normal mode. The background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is different between the normal mode (1) and the normal mode (2).

Specifically, the normal mode (1) is a normal mode that shifts from the time saving mode B when the time saving gaming state ends due to the special symbol change being performed 50 times or 95 times after the jackpot gaming state ends. That is, when the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode B to the normal mode when the time saving game state ends due to the special symbol change being performed 50 times after the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal mode is changed. This is the normal mode (1). In addition, when the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode B to the normal mode when the time saving game state ends due to the special symbol change being performed 95 times after the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal mode is changed. This is the normal mode (1). Since the big hits in which the number of time reductions is 50 or 95 times are usually only big hits (see FIGS. 79A and 79B), in these cases, it is determined that the game is in a non-probable variable gaming state. The normal mode (1) is a normal mode in which it is confirmed that the game is in a non-probable variable game state.

On the other hand, the normal mode (2) is a normal mode that shifts from the time saving mode A when the time saving game state ends due to the special symbol change being performed five times after the big hit gaming state ends, or the big hit gaming state. This is a normal mode in which the mode shifts from the time-saving mode B when the time-saving gaming state ends due to the special symbol change being performed 35 times after the end of. That is, when the effect mode shifts from the time-saving mode A to the normal mode when the time-saving game state ends due to the special symbol change being performed five times after the big hit game state ends, the normal mode is changed. This is the normal mode (2). In addition, when the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode B to the normal mode when the time saving game state ends due to the special symbol change being performed 35 times after the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal mode is changed. This is the normal mode (2). As the jackpot with 5 or 35 time reductions, both the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are provided (see FIGS. 79A and 79B). In these cases, whether or not the game is in the probabilistic gaming state. Is in a difficult state to distinguish. The normal mode (2) is a normal mode in which it is not determined which of the probabilistic gaming state and the non-probabilistic gaming state is.

When it is determined in step S1362 that the current effect mode is the normal mode (1), the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of step S1363 and step S1364. Since the processes of steps S1363 and S1364 are the same as the processes of steps S1326 and S1327 of FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1364, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the normal mode (1) (normal mode (2)), the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the effect selection flag is set to ON (step S1365). ). In the present embodiment, as the normal mode (2), when the game ball wins a prize in the croon during the special symbol change, only the probability change suggestion effect can be performed out of the probability change suggestion effect and the jackpot reliability suggestion effect. Similar to the time saving mode B (1) (see FIG. 131), if the effect content (which effect is to be performed, the probability change suggestion effect or the jackpot reliability suggestion effect) is different depending on the timing when the game ball wins the croon. There is a mode (effect selection mode) that allows you to play. The player can select to play the game in the effect selection mode, and the effect selection flag is turned on when the player operates a button to play the game in the effect selection mode. Is set to.

If it is determined that the effect selection flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of step S1366 and step S1376. Since the processing of step S1366 and step S1376 is the same processing as the processing of step S1324 and step S1325 in FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1637, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect selection flag is set to on, the sub CPU 330 executes the process during the normal mode when the effect is selected (step S1368). As the process during the normal mode when the effect is selected, the sub CPU 330 executes the same process as the process of steps S1322 to S1327 of FIG. 131. That is, when the sub CPU 330 determines that the reach effect pattern has been determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 has a probability variation suggestion effect (FIG. 134 (a). ) And FIG. 134 (b)) or the jackpot reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 134 (c)) is determined, and the effect data corresponding to the determined effect content is set. As a result, if the game ball wins the crune before reaching the reach timing corresponding to the reach effect pattern this time, the probability change suggestion effect is performed, while the game ball wins the crune after reaching the reach timing. In that case, the jackpot reliability suggestion effect will be performed. After executing these processes, the sub-CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

It has been described that when at least one of the probabilistic change sound effect and the second lamp effect is performed, it is determined that the probabilistic game state is established (see FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b)). ), The probability change suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests the probability change reliability (latent probability expectation). That is, a plurality of types of effects are provided as the probability change suggestion effects, and the plurality of types of effects can be executed in both the probabilistic game state and the non-probability change game state, and are in the probability change game state. Depending on whether or not the effect is selected, the probability of selection of each effect may be different from each other.

<Production pattern (for time saving mode A)>
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode of the staging pattern. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 135 is various variation effect patterns that can occur in the time saving mode A.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "301" to "306", the effect that the character operates in a predetermined mode (pry open the door) is performed. The countdown is performed from the start of the time saving mode A, and the number (timer) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 gradually decreases from 60. If the character can pry open the shutter by the time the number reaches 0, it is a success (continuation of the short game state or a big hit).

The effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "301" to "303" occurs when the first, second, third, or fourth special symbol change is performed after the jackpot game state is completed. It is a production to get. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "301", the timer related to the countdown is displayed small, and the effect of successfully prying open the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "302", the timer related to the countdown is displayed small, and the effect of failing to pry the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "303", the timer related to the countdown is displayed small, and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, so that the effect of successfully prying the door is performed.

The effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "304" to "306" are effects that can occur when the fifth special symbol change is performed after the jackpot game state is completed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "304", the timer related to the countdown is displayed in a large size, and the effect of successfully prying open the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "305", the timer related to the countdown is displayed in a large size, and the effect of failing to pry the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "306", the timer related to the countdown is displayed in a large size, and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, so that the effect of successfully prying the door is performed.

The effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "301", "303", "304", and "306" is the number of special symbol changes in which the time-saving gaming state can be continued after the latest jackpot gaming state ends, that is, It is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous big hit (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is more than 5 times, or when the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit. .. When the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot and these effect patterns are selected, the mode shifts to the jackpot mode after the effect is completed. When the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous big hit (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is more than 5 times, and the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, these effect patterns When is selected, the mode shifts to the time saving mode B after the effect is completed.

The effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "302" is a case where the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous big hit (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is 5 times or more than 5 times, and is related to this special symbol change. This is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. When the effect number "302" is selected, the time saving mode A remains after the effect is completed. As for the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "305", the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous jackpot (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is 5 times, and the result of the jackpot determination related to this special symbol change is lost. It is an effect pattern that can be selected in a certain case. When the effect number "305" is selected, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the effect is completed.

<Direction during time saving mode A>
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the time saving mode A.

FIG. 136A shows how the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The remaining time limit 6300 is an image corresponding to a number (timer) indicating the remaining time (remaining time limit) of the time limit (60 seconds) given for the character to pry open the shutter. When the time saving mode A starts, "60.00" is largely displayed as the remaining time limit 6300 in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the special symbol change has not been performed even once after the time saving mode A is started. In this state, the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed up to the second decimal place. In FIG. 136 (a), "58.68" is shown as the remaining time limit of 6300, but in reality, the numbers after the decimal point change every moment at high speed, so that the player can visually recognize them. Have difficulty.

FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (a). In this state, the first special symbol change is performed after the jackpot game state is completed, and the character tries to pry open the door. Specifically, the door 6301 (right door 6301R and left door 6301L) is displayed, and the gap 6302 is displayed between the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L. In the figure, the door 6301 is shown by diagonal lines for the sake of clarity. Further, in reality, a part of the character's body that tries to pry open the door 6301 by hooking a finger on the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L is also displayed, but the illustration is omitted. The remaining time limit 6300 is displayed as small as "53. ↓" in the lower right portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. Since the number with the first decimal place changes at high speed, it is indicated by an arrow in the figure. Although not shown, the changing decorative pattern 6130 (see FIG. 128) is also displayed small.

FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which about 7 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (b). In this state, the first special symbol variation is completed, and the remaining time limit 6300 is largely displayed in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4, as in FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 136 (d) shows a state in which about 9 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (c). In this state, the second special symbol change is performed, and the character tries to pry open the door. Similar to FIG. 136 (b), the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L are displayed, and the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed small in the lower right portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

After that, "2nd special symbol change end"-> "3rd special symbol change start"-> "3rd special symbol change end"-> "4th special symbol change start"-> "4th special symbol change end" ". During that time, similarly to FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (d), the enlarged display and the reduced display of the remaining time limit 6300 are repeated. FIG. 136 (e) shows a state after the fourth special symbol change is completed and before the fifth special symbol change is started. In this state, the remaining time limit 6300 is largely displayed in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG. 136 (f) shows a state in which about 3 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (e). In this state, the fifth special symbol change is performed, and the character tries to pry open the door. As the remaining time limit 6300, "8" is displayed in the gap 6302 formed between the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L. In the present embodiment, when the remaining time limit is less than "10", the remaining time limit is 6300, and "9" → "8" → "7" → "6" → "5" → "4" → "3" → "2"-> "1"-> "0" is displayed in order, and the countdown is performed.

In the above, it has been described that the time limit given for the character to pry open the shutter is 60 seconds. The time limit generally corresponds to the time required for the special symbol change to be performed five times. However, in reality, the time required for the special symbol to be changed five times may be longer than 60 seconds depending on the timing at which the start opening prize is generated and the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the length of the variation effect). , It's short. Therefore, by appropriately adjusting the speed at which the number of the integer part in the remaining time limit 6300 is subtracted, the timing at which the fifth special symbol variation ends and the timing at which the remaining time limit 6300 becomes "0" are matched. You may. As described above, since the number after the decimal point in the remaining time limit of 6300 changes at high speed, even if such an adjustment is made, it can be shown to the player without discomfort. As a result, for example, when the first special symbol change ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to "48", and when the second special symbol change ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to "36", and the third time. When the special symbol change ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to "24", when the fourth special symbol change ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to "12", and when the fifth special symbol change ends. It is possible to set the remaining time limit 6300 to "0".

<Pending change effect (1) Execution processing>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a hold change effect (1) execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

The hold change effect (1) execution process shown in FIG. 137 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) in a predetermined effect mode.

Hold change effect (1) In the execution process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the candle flame is newly lit (step S1401). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, in a predetermined effect mode, images corresponding to a predetermined number (5) of candles are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Initially, these candles are not lit, but each time a predetermined lighting condition is met, a new candle is lit. The predetermined lighting conditions include the condition that a predetermined variable effect pattern is selected, the condition that a predetermined look-ahead effect pattern is selected, and the lottery for selecting the variable effect pattern and the look-ahead effect pattern. Conditions such as winning the lottery are set. In the process of step S1401, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not such a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied (whether or not the number of candles lit by the flame has increased).

When it is determined that the candle flame is not newly lit, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the candle flame is newly lit, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the number of candles lit by the flame is a predetermined number (step S1402). When it is determined that the number of candles whose flame is lit is not a predetermined number, the sub CPU 330 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of candles lit by flames is a predetermined number, the sub CPU 330 causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display an image in which a predetermined item falls and collides with one holding ball. , The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1403). The images corresponding to the reserved balls include the first reserved ball image 6131a, the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d (see FIG. 114A), as well as this special image. The reserved ball image 6132 (see FIG. 139) corresponding to the symbol variation is displayed. By executing the process of step S1403, an image in which a predetermined item is pierced into the reserved ball image of one of these five reserved ball images is played. The sub CPU 330 determines the one reserved ball image to be pierced by the predetermined item before executing the process of step S1403 (before the flame is lit on all five candles). Until all the candles in the book are lit, it is not possible to know which reserved ball image the one reserved ball image is (which reserved ball image is pierced).

Then, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to change the display mode of the one reserved ball image in which the predetermined item collides (step S1404). As a result, for example, the color of one reserved sphere image may change, or characters or characters may appear on the reserved sphere image. The display mode of these reserved ball images suggests a jackpot reliability (see FIG. 134 (c)). That is, when the display mode of one reserved ball image changes, the probability that the result of the big hit determination corresponding to the reserved ball is a big hit is relatively increased. In other words, the effect pattern related to the hold change is more likely to be selected when the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold ball is a big hit than when the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold ball is a loss. It is a staging pattern. Further, as the display mode of the reserved ball image after the change, a plurality of display modes are provided, and the jackpot reliability can be suggested depending on which display mode is changed. For example, when the process of step S1404 is executed, the color of one reserved sphere image may always change to a color having a reliability of red or higher (red, gold, or rainbow color) (Fig.). 118 (b)). After executing the process of step S1404, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

<Pending change effect (2) Execution processing>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a hold change effect (2) execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

The hold change effect (2) execution process shown in FIG. 138 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub-control circuit 33 in a predetermined effect mode. The hold change effect (2) includes a change in the display mode (hold change) in the hold ball image and a display of the prophecy (a position (traveling direction) in which the prophecy (paper-like image) drops from above in the liquid crystal display device 4). It is a production that suggests the reliability of the big hit by the number of sheets). Hold change effect (2) In the execution process, a scenario regarding the presence or absence of a hold change and a look-ahead notice is determined, and if a hold change occurs thereafter, the color of the hold ball changes specifically. What kind of notice production will be performed is decided.

Specifically, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is the timing to perform the lottery at the time of winning (step S1421). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening or the second start opening. The sub CPU 330 receives the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers for the first start opening winning (see step S58 in FIG. 84) or the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers for the second starting opening winning (see step S66 in FIG. 84) to start the first start. It can be recognized that the game ball has won a prize in the mouth or the second starting mouth.

When it is determined that it is the timing to perform the lottery at the time of winning, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect has been won (step S1422). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect as a result of performing the lottery based on the random number value. If it is determined that the look-ahead effect has not been won, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect has been won, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding the pre-reading notice corresponding to the reserved ball related to the winning of the first starting port or the second starting port this time (step S1423). Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding whether or not a hold change is generated, whether or not the hold ball is operated (vibrated) in a manner suggesting a hold change, the number of prophecies, and the like (step S1424). ). Then, the sub CPU 330 determines by lottery an effect pattern corresponding to one scenario as a look-ahead effect pattern corresponding to the reserved ball according to the result of the scenario lottery performed in step S1423 and step S1424 (step S1425). .. After that, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1421 that it is not the timing to perform the lottery at the time of winning, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is the timing to perform the lottery at the time of fluctuation (step S1426). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is the timing when the special symbol change starts. The sub CPU 330 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. If it is determined that it is not the timing to perform the lottery at the time of fluctuation, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing to perform the lottery at the time of change, the flow (strength) of the effect in this special symbol change is drawn according to the result of the lottery (pending change) performed in steps S1423 to S1425. (Step S1427). The strength of the production is a concept according to the high reliability and flashiness of the production, and if the strength of the production is "strong", there is a possibility that a pending change will occur in this special symbol change. Is relatively high. Next, the sub CPU 330 determines by lottery whether or not there is a hold change in the special symbol change this time, and if there is a hold change, the presence or absence of the look-ahead effect and the result of the lottery (flow lottery) performed in step S1427. Based on this, the color of the reserved ball finally displayed as a result of the reserved change is determined by lottery at each timing when the reserved change can occur (step S1428). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of prophecies to be displayed as a ghost effect when the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to the special symbol change this time is a loss.

Next, based on the result of the flow lottery, the sub CPU 330 determines at what timing in the pseudo-ren the pending change is generated by lottery for each type of the pseudo-ren (step S1429). Next, the sub CPU 330 determines by lottery which effect causes the hold change at the timing when the hold change occurs (step S1430). When the pending change occurs twice, the process performed in step S1430 is performed for the second pending change. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the position where the prophecy falls (falls) from above.

Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding the timing and the number of times the prophecy progress direction is drawn (step S1431). Next, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of prophecies to be dropped further by lottery based on the maximum number of prophecies to be dropped from above and the number of prophecies that have already fallen (stored) (step S1432). ). After that, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine. By configuring as described above, it is possible to create a random feeling regarding the pending change and the display of the prophecy while reducing the amount of the staging data to be managed as compared with the case where the staging data for each scenario is stored.

<Countdown production>
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a countdown effect.

FIG. 139 shows an hourglass effect as an example of the countdown effect. The hourglass effect is an effect for counting down the appearance of the countdown target effect. The countdown target effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot reliability and the probability change reliability, and is an effect that is continuously performed over a certain period of time.

Specifically, FIG. 139 (a) shows how the hourglass image 6311 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 when the special symbol change is being performed. The hourglass image 6311 is an image imitating an hourglass, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 on condition that the countdown target effect is determined to be performed. FIG. 139 (a) shows a state about one minute before the start of the countdown target effect. In addition, in FIG. 139 (a), the reserved ball image 6132 corresponding to the special symbol change this time is displayed, and the prophecy image 6310 corresponding to the prophecy (see FIG. 138) is also displayed. Further, although not shown, the changing decorative pattern 6130 is also displayed small (see FIG. 128).

FIG. 139 (b) shows a state 8.5 seconds before the start of the countdown target effect. In this state, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the remaining time 6312 on the upper side of the hourglass image 6311. The remaining time 6312 is an image corresponding to a number indicating the remaining time until the countdown target effect starts. When the remaining time until the countdown target effect starts is less than 10 seconds, the remaining time 6312 is displayed, and the number indicated by the remaining time 6312 gradually decreases. The remaining time 6312 is displayed up to the second decimal place, but as with the remaining time limit 6300 (see FIG. 136), the numbers after the decimal point are changing at high speed and are visible to the player. Have difficulty. In addition, in FIG. 139 (b), the reserved ball image 6132 is displayed, and as the number of reserved balls increases from the state shown in FIG. 139 (a), the first reserved ball image 6131a and the second reserved ball are displayed. The image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. After the state shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the number indicated by the remaining time 6312 becomes "0", the countdown target effect is started.

<Direction pattern (suggestion of production reliability)>
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode of the effect pattern.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect numbers "401" to "405", a bird appears on the liquid crystal display device 4, and the reliability (effect reliability) of shifting to a predetermined effect is suggested depending on the flight mode of the bird. A possible production is performed.

Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "401", after a bird flies into the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 (appears so as to cross the screen), the bird flies out of the screen as it is. The production is done. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "402", a bird flies into the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, appears to fly toward you, and then the bird flies out of the screen as it is. The production is done.

In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "403", a bird flies into the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, and after showing the appearance of flying toward the front, the bird flies in the screen for a short time. The production of flying is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "404", a bird flies into the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, and after showing the appearance of flying toward the front, the bird is displayed on the screen for a medium period of time. The production of flying inside is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "405", a bird flies into the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, and after showing the appearance of flying toward the front, the bird flies over the screen for a long time. The production of flying is performed.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "403" to "405", after the bird repeatedly flies in the screen (loops of flight), it appears as if it plunges into the back, and whether or not to shift to the predetermined production. The result is displayed. When the bird flies in the screen for a long time, it is possible to shift to a predetermined effect with a higher probability than when the bird flies in the screen for a short time. That is, when the bird flies in the screen for a long time, the effect reliability is basically higher than when the bird flies in the screen for a short time. When a bird flies over the screen, it gradually rises (moves to a higher position on the screen) one or more times. Here, although not shown, the effect reliability is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 while the bird is flying in the screen. The reliability of the production gradually increases as the bird rises.

Specifically, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "403" to "405" is selected, the liquid crystal display device corresponds to the selected effect pattern (bird flight time). The initial value of the effect reliability displayed in 4, the effect reliability that can be finally reached, and the number of times the bird rises are determined by a lottery (scenario lottery). When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number "405" is selected, the place where the bird rises (position in the screen) is also determined by the scenario lottery.

Here, the initial value of the effect reliability displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is P%, the effect reliability that can be finally reached is Q%, and the number of times the bird rises is N times. At this time, since the effect reliability displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is updated (added) each time the bird rises, N times of addition is performed. Of the N additional values, the (N-1) additional value is determined by lottery, and the remaining one additional value is calculated using the values of P and Q. For example, if the value of the effect reliability added in the Kth increase ( _K is 1 to _N ) is RK, then P + (R ₁ + R ₂ + ... + _RN-1 + RN) = Q. .. R ₁ to _RN-1 are determined by lottery, and RN can be configured to be calculated by _QP- (R ₁ + R ₂ + ... + _RN-1 ). When P = 0, the value of P does not have to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the effect reliability.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has been described.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to notify the number of gaming values that a player can acquire (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51809). reference).

The present inventor thinks that it may be possible to create new entertainment by devising a notification method in the process of diligently studying the notification effect regarding the number of game values as described above. It came to.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), the specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. When,
A means of giving game value and
A notification means for notifying (displaying a plate) about the number of game values that can be granted by the granting means is provided.
The specific game state grants a first specific game state capable of imparting a first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) and a second predetermined number of game values (600 game balls). With a second specific gaming state that can be played,
The notification means is
A first notification means (sub CPU 330 that executes the process of step S1082 in FIG. 108) capable of performing notification (display of the "2400" plate) regarding the first predetermined number when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. When,
After the notification regarding the first predetermined number is performed by the first notification means, the second predetermined condition is satisfied before the game value of the first predetermined number is given by the first specific gaming state. In this case, the process of the second notification means (process of step S1103 in FIG. 112) capable of performing notification (display of the “3000” plate) regarding the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number is executed. Sub CPU330) and
A third notifying means (FIG. 112) capable of notifying the first predetermined number after the second notifying means has notified the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. Sub CPU330) that executes the process of step S1105.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a first specific gaming state (16R jackpot) capable of imparting a first predetermined number of gaming values (2400 gaming balls) is provided. When the first predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the first predetermined number (display of the "2400" plate). On the other hand, a second specific game state (4R jackpot) capable of imparting a second predetermined number of game values (600 game balls) is provided, and a notification regarding the first predetermined number ("2400" plate) is provided. If the second predetermined condition is satisfied before the first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) is given after the display) is performed, the first predetermined number (2400) is used. Notification regarding the total number with the second predetermined number (600) (display of the "3000" plate) is performed, and then the notification regarding the first predetermined number (display of the "2400" plate) can be performed again. It is configured. Thereby, by notifying the number of game values that can be given, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the psychological state of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, once a probabilistic jackpot occurs and the player shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, the player acquires a prize ball (2400 game balls) equivalent to the 16R jackpot by the time the game transitions to the normal gaming state. Explained as being able to. The probability variation jackpot corresponds to the first predetermined condition in the present invention. Further, when a 4R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can acquire a prize ball (600 game balls) corresponding to the 4R jackpot. The 4R probability variation jackpot corresponds to the second predetermined condition in the present invention. The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition in the present invention are not limited to these examples, and any condition can be appropriately adopted. The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a probabilistic big hit, a normal big hit, or a small hit, respectively, and the number of rounds is not particularly limited. Further, as the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, the condition that the predetermined decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the condition that the game ball wins the predetermined winning opening, the pre-reading effect, etc. You may adopt the condition that a predetermined effect (for example, an effect corresponding to a big hit) is performed.

Further, in the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine. For example, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination that triggers a transition of a gaming state or a symbol combination related to a small winning combination) is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined winning combination (for example, a bonus combination or an AT lottery trigger). The condition that the combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, the condition that the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times, the condition for shifting to the bonus gaming state such as BB and MB, the condition for shifting to the RT gaming state, and the AT gaming state. It is possible to adopt the transition condition to the (ART gaming state), the transition condition to the ART additional gaming state (the gaming state in which the number of ARTs is added), and the like as the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. ..

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the first predetermined number is 2400 and the second predetermined number is 600. As the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, any arbitrary number can be appropriately adopted, the first predetermined number may be larger than the second predetermined number, and the second predetermined number may be the first predetermined number. It may be larger than the number, or the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number may be the same number.

(A-2) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), the specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. When,
A means of giving game value and
A notification means for notifying (displaying a plate) about the number of game values that can be granted by the granting means is provided.
When the specific gaming state occurs a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the first predetermined number of gaming values (2400) in the Mth specific gaming state (M is an integer of 1 or more) among the plurality of specific gaming states. While it is possible to give (2 game balls), a second predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) are given in the Nth specific game state (N is an integer larger than M). May be possible,
The notification means is
A sub that executes the processes of step S1112 and step S1116 of FIG. 112, which can perform notification (display of the "4800" plate) regarding the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. CPU330) and
It is possible to notify the second predetermined number (display of the "2400" plate) after the first notification means notifies the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. A second notification means (sub CPU 330 that executes the process of step S1109 in FIG. 112) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) occurs a plurality of times, the Mth (M is 1) of the plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming state). It is possible to give the first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) in the specific game state (big hit game state) of the above integer), while the Nth time (N is an integer larger than M). It is possible to impart a second predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) in the specific game state (big hit game state) of. Then, the notification regarding the total number of the first predetermined number (2400) and the second predetermined number (2400) is performed (display of the "4800" plate), and then the notification regarding the second predetermined number (2400) ("2400" plate) is performed. Is configured to be able to display). Thereby, by notifying the number of game values that can be given, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the psychological state of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(A-2') Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), the specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. When,
Granting means to grant benefits and
A notification means for notifying (displaying a plate) about the amount of benefits that can be granted by the granting means is provided.
When the specific gaming state occurs a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the first privilege (2400 games) in the Mth specific gaming state (M is an integer of 1 or more) out of the plurality of specific gaming states. (Balls) can be granted, while the second privilege (2400 gaming balls) can be granted in the Nth specific gaming state (N is an integer larger than M). can be,
The notification means is
Processing of step S1112 and step S1116 of FIG. 112 capable of performing notification (display of the "4800" plate) regarding the total amount of the first privilege amount and the second privilege amount. Sub CPU330) that executes
After the first notification means notifies the total amount of the first privilege amount and the second privilege amount, the notification regarding the second privilege amount (display of the "2400" plate). A second notifying means (sub CPU 330 that executes the process of step S1109 in FIG. 112), which is capable of performing the above-mentioned method.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) occurs a plurality of times, the Mth (M is 1) of the plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming state). While it is possible to grant the first privilege (2400 gaming balls) in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) of the above integer), the Nth specific game (N is an integer larger than M). It is possible to grant a second privilege (2400 gaming balls) in the state (big hit gaming state). Then, the notification regarding the total amount of the first privilege amount (2400) and the second privilege amount (2400) is performed (display of the "4800" plate), and then the second privilege amount (2400) is related. It is configured to be able to perform notification (display of the "2400" plate). As a result, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the psychological state of the player by notifying the amount of the privilege that can be given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present invention, the Mth specific gaming state and the Nth specific gaming state may be continuous (that is, N = M + 1), or the Mth specific gaming state and the Nth specific gaming state. The specific gaming state may occur one or more times between the specific gaming state and the specific gaming state. The M-th specific game state and the N-th specific game state may be a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, respectively, and the number of rounds is not particularly limited. The Mth specific gaming state and the Nth specific gaming state are included in a plurality of specific gaming states that have occurred in a predetermined period, but the period in which the plurality of specific gaming states occur is arbitrary. It is possible to adopt the period of. For example, when the special symbol change that triggered the occurrence of one specific gaming state is stopped (started), one or more reserved balls exist, and one of the one or more reserved balls is the reserved ball. When the result of the corresponding predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (big hit) (held ream), the specific gaming state corresponding to the one reserved ball ends after the one specific gaming state starts. The period up to is may be adopted as a predetermined period. When there are a plurality of reserved balls whose predetermined lottery result is a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state generated by the reserved ball corresponding to the final starting opening winning among the plurality of reserved balls is generated. The time of termination may be adopted as the end of a predetermined period. In addition, when the special symbol change that triggered the occurrence of one specific gaming state is stopped (started), one or more reserved balls exist, and one of the one or more reserved balls is the reserved ball. Even if the result of the corresponding predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (big hit) (held ream), the timing after the specific gaming state corresponding to the one reserved ball ends (for example, the one). The time when the specific gaming state generated after the next time of the specific gaming state corresponding to the reserved ball of the above ends) may be adopted as the end of the predetermined period.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the first predetermined number is 2400 and the second predetermined number is 2400. As the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, any number can be appropriately adopted, the first predetermined number may be larger than the second predetermined number, and the second predetermined number may be the first predetermined number. It may be larger than the number, or the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number may be the same number.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the notification regarding the number of game balls is performed as the notification regarding the number of game values. In the present invention, the present invention is not limited to a gaming medium (including a game ball in a pachinko gaming machine, a medal in a pachislot gaming machine, and the like), and it is possible to notify various benefits. As such a privilege, it is possible to appropriately adopt a quantifiable target, for example, the number of games that can be played in a state where the player can easily acquire the game medium (for example, a time saving in a pachinko gaming machine). As a privilege, points related to the number of times, the number of ARTs in the pachislot machine, etc., and the degree of expectation of whether or not to notify the advantage for the player (for example, the game state after the jackpot game state ends) are adopted. You may. For example, notification regarding the number of such points (for example, the value of the yellow 7-number counter or the value of the navigation number counter) may be performed by displaying the plate described in the second embodiment. The mode of notification regarding the number is not limited to the display of the plate, and it is possible to appropriately adopt a mode in which the player can directly or indirectly recognize the number by sight or hearing. In addition, as notification regarding a predetermined number, in addition to the case where all of the number of benefits that can be granted (privileges that are confirmed to be granted) are notified, a part of the number is notified. In some cases, the numerical value itself may be notified, or the number that has already been decided to be given may be notified additionally to the number that has been decided to be given, and these may be totaled. You may notify the numerical value.

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to notify the number of gaming values that a player can acquire (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51809). reference).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to create new entertainment characteristics by devising the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
In a specific game state (big hit game state), a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (special round effect) that can suggest an advantage for the player, and a specific effect execution means.
Target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), and
A target counting means capable of counting the number of the predetermined grant targets granted by the target granting means before the start of the specific gaming state is provided.
The lottery means
It is possible to perform the predetermined lottery according to any one of a plurality of lottery gaming states (probability-changing gaming state or non-probability-changing gaming state) having different advantages for the player. ,
The specific effect executing means is
The specific effect can be executed and the specific effect can be executed at least within a period corresponding to the number of the predetermined grant targets at the time when the specific game state starts in the specific game state. It is possible to suggest the game state for lottery through.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, the player is in a lottery gaming state (probability-changing gaming state or non-probability-changing gaming state) among a plurality of lottery gaming states having different advantages for the player. Depending on the situation, it is possible to perform a predetermined lottery, and in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), a specific effect that can suggest the advantage (lottery gaming state (probability changing gaming state or non-probability changing gaming state)). (Direction for special round) can be executed. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be granted, and the grant is granted by the time a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) starts. It is possible to count the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7). Then, in the specific game state (big hit game state), at least within the period corresponding to the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) at the time when the specific game state (big hit game state) starts, the specific effect ( It is configured so that it is possible to execute a special round effect). This makes it possible to associate the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) with the period during which the specific effect (special round effect) is executed, and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is given to the player. You can be interested in the number of yellows, which can improve the interest of the game.

(B-2) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), the specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. When,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (effect for a special round) in the specific game state, and a specific effect execution means.
A game value-giving means capable of adding game value each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific game state, and
Target granting means capable of granting one or more predetermined grant targets (yellow 7), and
Each time the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the target consuming means capable of consuming one of the predetermined granting targets given by the target granting means is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
Among the predetermined grant targets granted by the target granting means, the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined grant target that has not been consumed by the target consuming means remains.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect) in a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, one or more predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) may be granted, while in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). It is possible to consume one predetermined grant target (yellow 7) each time a predetermined condition (attacker winning) (condition for granting game value) is satisfied. Then, when a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) that has not been consumed remains among the predetermined grant targets (yellow 7), the specific effect (special round effect) can be executed. Has been done. As a result, it is executed when the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7), which are consumed one by one each time the game value grant condition (attacker winning) is satisfied, remain. It is possible to make the player interested in the specific effect (effect for special round) that can be performed, and through this, the interest of the game can be improved.

(B-3) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (effect for a special round) that can suggest an advantage for the player, and a specific effect execution means.
Target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), and
A target consuming means capable of consuming the predetermined grant target given by the target granting means, and a target consuming means.
The specific effect executing means is
When all the predetermined grant targets given by the target granting means are consumed by the target consuming means and the predetermined grant target disappears, and then the predetermined grant target is granted again by the target granting means. In the first period (the first to fifth round games shown in FIG. 123) until the predetermined grant target disappears, the specific effect can be controlled so that the specific effect can be executed, and the predetermined grant target can be executed. In the second period (sixth to tenth round games shown in FIG. 123) from when the target is lost until the predetermined grant target is granted again by the target granting means, the specific effect cannot be executed. In the third period (12th round game shown in FIG. 123) after the predetermined grant target is granted again by the target granting means, the specific effect can be executed. Is controllable,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a specific effect (effect for a special round) that can suggest an advantage for the player. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to give a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), but it is possible to consume the predetermined grant target (yellow 7). It is possible. Then, when all the given predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) are consumed and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) disappears, and then the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is given again, the predetermined grant is given. In the first period (the first to fifth round games shown in FIG. 123) until the target (yellow 7) disappears, it is possible to control so that a specific effect (special round effect) can be executed, and it is predetermined. In the second period (sixth to tenth round games shown in FIG. 123) from the disappearance of the grant target (yellow 7) to the re-grant of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7), the specific effect ( It is possible to control so that the special round effect) cannot be executed, and in the third period (12th round game shown in FIG. 123) after the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is granted again. It is configured to be controllable so that a specific effect (effect for a special round) can be executed. As a result, depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7), after the period in which the specific effect (special round effect) is executed and the period in which the specific effect (special round effect) is not executed, the specific effect (special round effect) is not executed again. It is possible to generate a period during which a specific effect (effect for a special round) is executed. Then, through the transition of whether or not such a specific effect (effect for special round) is executed, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the psychological state of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is “lost”, the value of the counter (yellow 7 number counter) stored in the storage means (RAM) or the predetermined grant displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition to the case where some value such as the number of targets (yellow 7) becomes 0, for example, when the image corresponding to the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) displayed on the liquid crystal display device disappears (visual and physical). Or, numerically, the case where the remaining number is exhausted, and the case where the existing one disappears) are included.

(B-4) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means, a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player is performed. Specific game state transition means that can be transferred to (game state),
A staging execution means that can perform a staging,
Provided with a target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7),
The predetermined result includes the first predetermined result (probability variation jackpot) and the second predetermined result (normal jackpot).
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the second predetermined result. Is also controllable in the player's favor,
The effect executing means is
Target grant suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the predetermined grant target is granted between the time when the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means and the time when the identification information is derived and displayed by the symbol variation means. (Yellow 7 granting effect) can be executed,
The target granting means is
Only when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means after the target granting suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, the predetermined grant target corresponding to the target grant suggestion effect is deterministically assigned. When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result. 2 It is possible to control so that the amount of the predetermined grant target to be given can be larger than when the predetermined result is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is performed. It is possible to shift to (big hit gaming state), and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result (probability variable big hit), the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result (normally). It is possible to control more favorably for the player than in the case of a big hit). Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result (probability variable jackpot), the predetermined lottery result is given as compared with the case where the predetermined lottery result is the second predetermined result (normal jackpot). It is possible to control so that the amount of the grant target (yellow 7) can be large. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is assigned between the time when the predetermined lottery is performed and the time when the identification information is derived and displayed. While it is possible to execute the target grant suggestion effect (yellow 7 grant effect) that suggests the possibility, only when the predetermined derivation display is performed after the target grant suggestion effect (yellow 7 grant effect) is executed. , It is configured so that a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) corresponding to the target grant suggestion effect (yellow 7 grant effect) can be definitively given. Through such a target grant suggestion effect (yellow 7 grant effect), the player is expected that the result of the predetermined lottery will be a predetermined result (big hit) (particularly, the first predetermined result (probability variable big hit)). , It is possible to cause ups and downs in the psychological state of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(B-5) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), the specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. When,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (effect for a special round) in the specific game state, and a specific effect execution means.
A staging mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of staging modes including a first staging mode (second special mode) and a second staging mode (time saving mode B).
Target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), and
In the specific gaming state, the target consuming means capable of consuming the predetermined grant target given by the target granting means as the game progresses is provided.
The predetermined result includes the first predetermined result (probability variation jackpot) and the second predetermined result (normal jackpot).
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the second predetermined result. Is also controllable in the player's favor,
The specific effect is an effect that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result.
The target granting means is
In the second effect mode, the predetermined grant is given only when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result and the predetermined condition is satisfied (freeze effect occurs). On the other hand, in the first effect mode, it is possible to give the predetermined grant target even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied.
The specific effect executing means is
Among the predetermined grant targets granted by the target granting means, when the predetermined grant target that has not been consumed by the target consuming means remains, the specific effect can be executed and the specific effect can be executed. In the specific gaming state in which the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means in the first effect mode shifts to the predetermined result, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Also, while it is possible to execute the specific effect, the specific effect shifts when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means in the second effect mode becomes the predetermined result. Even in the gaming state, the specific effect can be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when the result of a predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. It is possible, and in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect). Specifically, while it is possible to grant a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed as the game progresses in the specific game state (big hit game state). This is possible, and when a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) that has not been consumed remains, it is possible to execute a specific effect (effect for special round). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, in the second effect mode (time saving mode B), the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit), and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to grant a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) only when it is satisfied (freeze effect occurs), while in the first effect mode (second special mode), a predetermined condition is satisfied (yellow 7). It is configured so that a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) can be granted even if the freeze effect is not generated). Then, in relation to this, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that shifts when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) in the first effect mode (second special mode). In, it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect) even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (freeze effect occurs), while a predetermined effect mode (time saving mode B) is used. Even in the specific game state (big hit game state) that shifts when the result of the lottery is a predetermined result (big hit), the specific effect (freeze effect occurs) only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured so that it is possible to execute a special round effect). The specific effect (effect for special round) is an effect that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result (probability variation jackpot) (advantageous result for the player), and the second embodiment. According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the above, the first predetermined result is obtained by providing different effect modes in relation to the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) and the specific effect (effect for special round). It is possible to create diversity in the player's expectation for (probability change jackpot) and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the specific game state (big hit game state) that shifts when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result (big hit) in the second effect mode (time saving mode B), the specific effect (for special round) The condition for the effect) to be executed is not limited to the occurrence of the freeze effect, and any condition can be appropriately adopted. As such a condition, in addition to the condition that a predetermined effect is performed and the condition that a predetermined effect pattern is selected, for example, a predetermined decorative pattern combination (for example, V alignment or G alignment) is stopped. The condition that it is displayed may be adopted.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that the effect of displaying the special character on the liquid crystal display device 4 (effect for appearance of the special character) is an effect that can be executed only when the probability change jackpot is reached (probability change confirmation effect). As the specific effect (effect for special round) in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately adopt an effect that can suggest an advantage for the player. For example, the special round effect (special character appearance effect) is performed only in the case of a relatively advantageous hit for the player (for example, a probability variation big hit, a big hit with a large number of time reductions, a big hit with a large number of rounds, etc.). It may be configured as. Further, even in the case of a hit that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal big hit, a big hit with a small number of time reductions, a big hit with a small number of rounds, etc.), a special round effect (special character appearance effect) can be performed. However, in the case of a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of time reductions, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, etc.), a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal). It may be configured so that the special round effect (special character appearance effect) is performed with a higher probability than in the case of a big hit, a big hit with a small number of time reductions, a big hit with a small number of rounds, etc.).

Further, in the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine. For example, an effect that can suggest an advantage regarding a bonus game state such as BB or MB, an RT game state, an AT game state (ART game state), or the like may be adopted as a specific effect in the present invention. For example, while providing a bonus game state that is relatively advantageous to the player and a bonus game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, it is suggested through a specific effect which bonus game state the internal winning combination corresponds to. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that one predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed every time a predetermined condition (attacker winning) is satisfied. In the present invention, the consumption mode of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is not limited to this example. For example, as an opportunity for the predetermined grant target (Yellow 7) to be consumed, it is possible to adopt the establishment of arbitrary conditions, and the game is played at a predetermined winning opening (for example, a starting opening, an attacker, a general winning opening, etc.). When the ball wins, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed, or when one round is completed, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed, or the predetermined time may be consumed. When the lapse has passed, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed, or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed. When the number of special symbol changes is performed, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed. The gaming state in which the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed is not limited to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is not limited to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). May be consumed. Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine, when a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination that triggers a transition of a gaming state or a symbol combination related to a small combination) is stopped and displayed, or a predetermined combination is displayed. (For example, when a bonus combination or a combination that triggers an AT lottery) is determined as an internal winning combination, or when a predetermined number of unit games are played, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed. May be good. If the condition that triggers the consumption of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is satisfied, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed without fail, or the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed. Whether or not to consume may be decided by lottery. Further, the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) consumed when the condition is satisfied is not particularly limited, and a predetermined number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) may be consumed. However, the predetermined number of grant targets (yellow 7) determined by lottery may be consumed. The processing related to the consumption of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) includes a processing of subtracting the value of the counter (yellow 7 number counter) stored in the storage means (RAM) and a process of displaying the value on the liquid crystal display device. The process is not limited to the process of subtracting (updating) some value, such as the process of subtracting the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7), and for example, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It may be a process of erasing the corresponding image.

As the predetermined grant target in the present invention, a quantifiable target can be appropriately adopted, and a target whose number can be counted or a target represented by an amount may be used. The display mode of the predetermined grant target is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately expressed by a number, a character, a figure, a symbol, a shape, a color, or a combination thereof. Further, the predetermined amount to be given may be expressed by a meter or the like (see FIG. 128) instead of a numerical value.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the result of the special symbol change is a loss, yellow 7 is temporarily (provisionally) added (the value of the yellow 7 number counter is added) and then (step S1208 in FIG. 116). And step S1226 of FIG. 117), and later, the yellow 7 grant is canceled (see step S1229 of FIG. 117). In the present invention, if the result of the special symbol variation is a loss, the yellow 7 may not be added (the value of the yellow 7 number counter is added) from the original. In this case, the effect as if the yellow 7 is given (see FIG. 122 (b)) may be performed without the yellow 7 being given.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the number of additional yellow 7s is determined by lottery (see step S1274 in FIG. 120). According to this, the value of the yellow 7 number counter may not reach the yellow 7 upper limit number, but in the present invention, the value of the yellow 7 number counter is configured to always reach the yellow 7 upper limit number. May be good. For example, in the case where the freeze effect is performed, if 160 yellow 7s are not given before the big hit game state starts (see step S1236 in FIG. 117), the yellow 7 number counter is displayed during the big hit game state. Yellow 7 may be added so that the value always reaches 160. In this way, in order to make the value of the yellow 7 number counter reach the yellow 7 upper limit number, for example, a number corresponding to the shortfall (the difference between the yellow 7 upper limit number and the current yellow 7 number) with respect to the yellow 7 upper limit number. It is advisable to determine a scenario for adding Yellow 7 at the start of the jackpot gaming state so that all of Yellow 7 are granted during the jackpot gaming state.

In the present invention, the content of the effect performed in each round game may be determined in advance. The timing for determining the content of the effect is not particularly limited, and may be at the start of the jackpot gaming state, or before the start of the jackpot gaming state (for example, the special symbol change that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state). It may be at the end, at the time of executing the big hit determination that triggered the occurrence of the big hit game state, etc.). In this case, the content of the effect performed in all the round games may be determined in advance, or the content of the effect performed in each round game other than the first round may be determined in advance.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such that the gaming ball has passed through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched gaming ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), The player is provided with a device that shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, if a predetermined number of gaming balls can be inserted into the winning opening, the mission is successful, and a gaming machine configured to perform a special effect is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017). -Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 221523).

The present inventor may be able to create new entertainment by devising the conditions for generating the effects in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on the gaming machine. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to draw a predetermined lottery when a prize is won,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means, a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player is performed. Specific game state transition means that can be transferred to (game state),
It is provided with an information suggesting means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined winning (winning of a game ball) is established during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means.
The information suggestion means
If the predetermined prize is established within the first period (the period until reaching the reach) during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means, the first predetermined information (probability variation game) is established. Information about the state) can be suggested, but if the predetermined prize is established within the second period (the period after reaching the reach) different from the first period, the first. 1 It is possible to suggest a second predetermined information (information about a jackpot) that is different from the predetermined information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to suggest predetermined information when a predetermined prize (winning of a game ball) is established during the period when the identification information is changed. Is. Specifically, if a predetermined prize (winning of a game ball) is established within the first period (the period until reaching the reach) during the period in which the identification information is changed, the first predetermined prize is established. While it is possible to suggest information (information about the probabilistic game state), if a predetermined prize (game ball prize) is established within the second period (the period after reaching the reach), the first 2 It is configured so that it is possible to suggest predetermined information (information about a jackpot). In this way, by making the content of the suggested information different according to the timing when the predetermined winning (winning of the game ball) is established, it is possible to create diversity in the production for suggesting the information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means, a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player is performed. Specific game state transition means that can be transferred to (game state),
When a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied, one of a plurality of effects including the first effect (big hit reliability suggestion effect) and the second effect (probability change suggestion effect) is performed. It is equipped with a directing execution means that can be used.
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (probability variation jackpot) and the second predetermined result (normal jackpot) are provided.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the second predetermined result. Is also controllable in the player's favor,
The first effect is an effect that may suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means may have resulted in the predetermined result, and the second effect is the type of the predetermined result. It is a production that can suggest
The effect executing means is
It is possible to perform an effect according to the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is performed. It is possible to shift to (big hit game state). Further, as the predetermined result (big hit), a plurality of types of results including the first predetermined result (probability variable big hit) and the second predetermined result (normal big hit) are provided, and the predetermined lottery result is the first. When a predetermined result (probability variable jackpot) is obtained, the player can control the result more advantageously than when the predetermined lottery result is a second predetermined result (normal jackpot). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, any one of a plurality of effects including the first effect (big hit reliability suggestion effect) and the second effect (probability change suggestion effect). It is possible to do. Specifically, the first effect (big hit reliability suggestion effect) is an effect that can suggest the possibility that the result of a predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (big hit), and the second effect (probability change suggestion effect). ) Is an effect that can suggest the type of a predetermined result (big hit), and it is possible to perform an effect according to the timing when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied among a plurality of effects. It is configured. In this way, by making the content of the effect to be executed different according to the timing when the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball) is satisfied, it is possible to create diversity in the effect, and it is possible to create a variety of the effect of the game. Can be improved.

(C-3) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (for example). , A specific game state transition means that can be transferred to the jackpot game state),
A staging mode control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of staging modes including a first staging mode (normal mode (1)) and a second staging mode (normal mode (2)).
Provided with information suggestion means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied.
The information suggestion means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first effect mode, it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information (information about the jackpot), while the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second effect mode. If it is established, it is possible to suggest a second predetermined information (information regarding a probabilistic gaming state) different from the first predetermined information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to suggest predetermined information when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied. Specifically, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied in the first effect mode (normal mode (1)), it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information (information about a big hit). On the other hand, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied in the second effect mode (normal mode (2)), it is possible to suggest the second predetermined information (information regarding the probabilistic gaming state). It is configured as follows. In this way, by making the content of the suggested information different according to the effect mode when a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball) is satisfied, diversity is created in the effect for suggesting the information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-4) A symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4, etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means, a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player is performed. Specific game state transition means that can be transferred to (game state),
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the specific game state end means for ending the specific game state and the specific game state end means.
Any one of a plurality of gaming states including a first predetermined gaming state (non-probable variable gaming state) and a second predetermined gaming state (probable variable gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. Predetermined game state control means that can control the state,
It is provided with a suggestion means capable of giving a predetermined suggestion when a specific condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied.
The lottery means
When the predetermined gaming state control means controls the second predetermined gaming state, the predetermined game state control means has a higher probability than when the predetermined gaming state control means controls the first predetermined gaming state. The result of the lottery can be controlled so as to be the predetermined result.
The suggestion means
After the specific gaming state is terminated by the specific gaming state ending means, until the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed by the symbol changing means reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined gaming state controlling means is used to perform the first. 2 While it is possible to suggest the possibility of being controlled to the predetermined gaming state, after the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed by the symbol changing means reaches the predetermined number of times, the possibility is raised. It is possible to make other suggestions without suggesting,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state advantageous to the player is performed. It is possible to shift to (big hit game state). Further, when controlled to the second predetermined gaming state (probability changing gaming state), the result of the predetermined lottery is more likely than when controlled to the first predetermined gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state). It is possible to control so as to obtain a predetermined result (big hit). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to make a predetermined suggestion when a specific condition (winning of a gaming ball) is satisfied. Specifically, until the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed (the number of times the derived display is displayed) reaches a predetermined number after the specific game state (big hit game state) is completed, the second predetermined game state (probability variable game state) is reached. ), While it is possible to suggest other suggestions without suggesting the possibility after the number of derived indications reaches a predetermined number. Has been done. In this way, it is different whether or not it suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second predetermined gaming state (probability variable gaming state) according to the number of times of derivation display when a specific condition (winning of the game ball) is satisfied. By making it possible, it is possible to create diversity in the production for making the suggestion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that when a predetermined condition (Crune winning) is satisfied during the special symbol change, the suggestion of predetermined information (probability change suggestion or jackpot reliability suggestion) is performed. In the present invention, the condition for suggesting predetermined information is not limited to the Kroon prize, and any condition can be appropriately adopted, and the special symbol does not change in the condition. It may be established at times. For example, the condition that the game ball wins in a predetermined area and the predetermined symbol combination (including the decorative symbol combination in the pachinko gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination in the pachislot gaming machine) are stopped and displayed. The condition that the result of the predetermined lottery (including the big hit judgment in the pachinko gaming machine and the internal lottery in the pachinko gaming machine) is the predetermined result, and the predetermined operation (various operations in the pachinko gaming machine, as well as the pachislot game). The condition that the stop operation (including the operation of the stop button at a predetermined pressing order and timing) in the machine is performed may be adopted as a condition for suggesting the predetermined information. When the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in a predetermined area (predetermined winning) is adopted, the predetermined areas include a starting opening, a general winning opening, a passing gate that triggers a normal symbol lottery, and an out. It is possible to mention a mouth (an area provided at the bottom of the game area where a game ball that has not won a prize in another winning mouth is accepted) and the like. The predetermined prize may be a special symbol change or a normal symbol change as a result of the game ball passing through the predetermined area, a payout may be made, or a payout may be made. It may not be done.

Further, in the present invention, the suggested information is not limited to the probability change suggestion and the jackpot reliability suggestion, and any information can be suggested. For example, information on the success or failure of a condition for operating a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the advantage related to the specific gaming state (for example, whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds, etc.). May be suggested. In the present invention, the gaming states (specific gaming states) that are advantageous for the player include a jackpot gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine, a probabilistic gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a bonus gaming state in a pachislot gaming machine (BB gaming state and MB). A gaming state such as a gaming state), an RT gaming state, or an AT gaming state (ART gaming state) can be appropriately adopted.

In the second embodiment, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied within the first period (the period until reaching the reach), the first predetermined information (information regarding the probabilistic gaming state) is suggested. On the other hand, if the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball) is satisfied within the second period (the period after reaching the reach), the second predetermined information (information about the jackpot) is suggested. did. In the present invention, of course, conversely, if a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball) is satisfied within the first period (the period until reaching the reach), the second predetermined information (information about a big hit). On the other hand, if the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball) is satisfied within the second period (the period after reaching the reach), the first predetermined information (information on the probabilistic gaming state) is suggested. You may do it.

The first period and the second period are not limited to the period until reaching the reach and the period after reaching the reach, respectively, and may be a period defined by a time independent of the reach. For example, the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the lapse of a predetermined time is set as the first period, and the period after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the identification information is the second period. May be. In addition, the period until the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed reaches a predetermined number of times after the game state advantageous to the player (specific game state) is completed is set as the first period, and the game state advantageous to the player. The second period may be a period after the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed reaches a predetermined number of times after the (specific game state) is completed. As the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed, it is possible to adopt the number of unit games in the pachislot game machine as well as the number of times the special symbol changes in the pachinko game machine. The first period and the second period may be continuous periods or periods separated from each other by a certain period of time. For example, the timing at which the special symbol change starts is T ₀ , the timing at which the special symbol change ends is T ₅ , and any timing during the period from T ₀ to T ₅ is T ₁ , T ₂ , T ₃ , and so on. When T ₄ is set, the period in which any two timings of T ₀ to T ₅ are the start and end (for example, T ₀ to T ₁ , T ₀ to T ₂ , T ₀ to T ₃ , T ₁ to T 1). _{T2 ,} T1 to T3 _, T3 to _T4 , _T3 to _T5 , _T4 to _T5 , etc.) may be used as the _first period and the second period. As T ₁ to T ₄ , for example, it is possible to adopt a timing in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, a timing in which the decorative symbol develops into a normal reach or a super reach, and the like.

In the above, it has been described that examples of the symbol changing means in the present invention include the first special symbol display unit 5C, the second special symbol display unit 5D, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the like. The symbol changing means is not particularly limited as long as it can change the identification information, and the identification information includes special symbols and decorative symbols in pachinko gaming machines, ordinary symbols, and the like, as well as in pachislot gaming machines. It is also possible to adopt a pattern drawn on the reel.

<Additional notes (others)>
Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in the game area where the launched game ball can roll. It is provided with a variable display control means that controls variable display and derives and displays identification information on which variable display is performed, which is advantageous to the player when the derived and displayed identification information is in a predetermined combination. There is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state (so-called "big hit").

In addition, conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and the start lever is operated by the player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A signal that detects that the start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels have been pressed by the player, and requests that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. A stop switch that outputs It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls the operation and rotates and stops each reel. When it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

However, since the conventional pachinko and pachislot machines do not have the configuration and function as a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

[Other expandability of gaming machines according to the present embodiment]
When the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot, or a credited medal is a maximum BET button, or 1-BET. If the game is started by operating a button (pressing the button) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper mechanism is driven and the medal is paid out or credited from the medal payout exit. However, the form is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is played based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal. That is, the gaming value in the present invention is not limited to the physically existing gaming medium, and any tangible or intangible object that can be used for playing the game can be appropriately adopted. Such an intangible object may be game medium data (for example, medal data) equivalent to a tangible object (physically existing gaming medium) such as a medal. Further, the mode of imparting the game value to the player is not limited to the mode in which the physically existing game medium actually moves under the possession of the player, and even if it is a mere data movement that does not involve the movement of a tangible object. Alternatively, a tangible object (card or the like) in which the game medium data is stored may be given to the player. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In this case, the gaming medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine, and bidirectionally communicates with an external gaming medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is possible to connect and win a prize (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation) or a role related to a game medium payout operation (that is, an operation of providing a game medium). When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium used for the game is used. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. Has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the data may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without a medal, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector and the hopper mechanism, or these are controlled by the main control circuit and the control result is transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot gaming machine is described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, the game medium management device is similarly provided and the game is played. It is also possible to manage the game medium of the person.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the selector, hopper mechanism, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced to consume the gaming machine. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability and the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600sec, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, the wave of balls can be made more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only gaming machines that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, a pachislot gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.).

Although the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is merely exemplified, and the present invention is not particularly limited, and the specific configuration of each means and the like is appropriately redesigned. It is possible. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Further, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. In addition, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the documents and the like already disclosed be fully taken into consideration in the interpretation.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed by the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. Further, in each process, electrical or magnetic signals are transmitted / received, recorded, and the like. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

1 Pachinko machine 4000 First accessory device 4200 Lower movable effect accessory 4210 Lower rotation decoration 4220 Lower rotation drive mechanism 4300 Lower accessory elevating mechanism 4330 Left drive mechanism 4340 Right drive mechanism 4400 Upper movable effect 4410 Upper rotation Dynamic decoration 4420 Upper rotation drive mechanism 4500 Upper accessory elevating mechanism 4530 Left drive mechanism 4540 Right drive mechanism 5000 Deuteragonist device 5100 Left movable ornament 5120 Left movable ornament 5200 Right movable director 5220 Right movable decoration body 6001 Pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

A symbol change means that can change the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
A lottery means to draw a predetermined lottery when a prize is won,
After the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result, when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. Possible specific game state transition means and
It is provided with an information suggesting means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined winning is established during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means.
The information suggestion means
If the predetermined prize is established within the first period during the period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means, at least a plurality of types of effects are performed within the first period. While it is possible to suggest the first information, if the predetermined winning is established within the second period different from the first period, at least the plurality of types within the second period. It is possible to suggest a second information different from the first information by performing a relatively smaller kind of production than the production of.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images